[go: up one dir, main page]

TWI788543B - Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film - Google Patents

Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI788543B
TWI788543B TW108110458A TW108110458A TWI788543B TW I788543 B TWI788543 B TW I788543B TW 108110458 A TW108110458 A TW 108110458A TW 108110458 A TW108110458 A TW 108110458A TW I788543 B TWI788543 B TW I788543B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
protective film
meth
forming
adhesive layer
film
Prior art date
Application number
TW108110458A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202003251A (en
Inventor
佐伯尚哉
古野健太
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW202003251A publication Critical patent/TW202003251A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI788543B publication Critical patent/TWI788543B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J133/04Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • H10W74/00
    • H10W74/01
    • H10W99/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/20Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive itself
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/312Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier parameters being the characterizing feature

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Dicing (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)

Abstract

A supporting sheet of the present invention includes a substrate and an adhesive layer on the substrate, wherein the surface of the adhesive layer side of the substrate is an even surface. When test pieces are cut from five locations on the supporting sheet and the cross-sections of the adhesive layers of the five test pieces are observed, the average ratio (R-value) of the total linear distance between adjacent significant peaks/the linear distance in the horizontal direction with respect to the adhesive layer is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0.

Description

支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片Composite sheet for support sheet and protective film formation

本發明係有關於一種支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片。The present invention relates to a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film.

近年來,進行應用所謂倒裝(face down)方式的封裝法而製造半導體裝置。在倒裝方式,使用在電路面上具有凸塊等的電極之半導體晶片,前述電極與基板接合。因此,與半導體晶片之電路面為相反側的背面有露出之情形。In recent years, a semiconductor device has been manufactured by applying a packaging method of a so-called face down method. In the flip-chip method, a semiconductor wafer having electrodes such as bumps on the circuit surface is used, and the electrodes are bonded to the substrate. Therefore, the back surface on the opposite side to the circuit surface of the semiconductor wafer may be exposed.

有將含有有機材料之樹脂膜形成在該露出之半導體晶片的背面作為保護膜,且以附有保護膜的半導體晶片之方式被組入在半導體裝置之情形。保護膜,是為了防止在切割步驟、封裝之後等,在半導體晶片產生龜裂而使用。In some cases, a resin film containing an organic material is formed on the back surface of the exposed semiconductor wafer as a protective film, and it is incorporated into a semiconductor device as a semiconductor wafer with a protective film. The protective film is used to prevent cracks from occurring on the semiconductor wafer during the dicing process and after packaging.

此種保護膜,例如能夠藉由使具有硬化性之保護膜形成用薄膜硬化而形成。又,經調節物性之非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦能夠直接使用作為保護膜。而且,保護膜形成用薄膜是被貼附在半導體晶圓背面而使用。例如,有保護膜形成用薄膜與半導體晶圓的加工時所使用的支撐片一體化、在保護膜形成用複合片的狀態,被貼附在半導體晶圓的背面之情形,而且亦有在不與支撐片一體化的狀態、被貼附在半導體晶圓的背面之情形。Such a protective film can be formed, for example, by curing a curable thin film for forming a protective film. Moreover, the film for non-curable protective film formation whose physical property was adjusted can also be used as a protective film as it is. In addition, the thin film for protective film formation is used by sticking to the back surface of a semiconductor wafer. For example, there are cases where the film for forming a protective film is integrated with a support sheet used in processing a semiconductor wafer, and is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer in the state of a composite sheet for forming a protective film. The state of being integrated with the support sheet, and the state of being attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer.

保護膜形成用複合片藉由其中的保護膜形成用薄膜而被貼附在半導體晶片背面之後,採用各自適合的切割(dicing)且藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化而形成保護膜,而且將保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜切斷且將半導體晶圓分割(切割)成為的半導體晶片,並且適當地進行將在背面具有切斷後的保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜之半導體晶片(附保護膜形成用薄膜的半導體晶片或附保護膜的半導體晶片)從支撐片拾取等。而且將附保護膜形成用薄膜的半導體晶片拾取時,這是藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化而成為附保護膜的半導體晶片,最後使用附保護膜的半導體晶片而能夠製造半導體裝置。如此,保護膜形成用複合片中的支撐片能夠利用作為切割片。而且,保護膜形成用薄膜為非硬化性時,在此等各步驟中,保護膜形成用薄膜能夠直接使用作為保護膜而操作。After the composite sheet for forming a protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer with the thin film for forming a protective film therein, the protective film is formed by hardening the thin film for forming a protective film by appropriate dicing, and the The film for forming a protective film or the protective film is cut and the semiconductor wafer is divided (diced) into a semiconductor wafer, and the semiconductor wafer (with protective film) having the thin film for forming a protective film or the protective film after cutting on the back surface is suitably processed Thin-film-forming semiconductor wafers or semiconductor wafers with protective films) are picked up from a support sheet, etc. When picking up a semiconductor wafer with a protective film forming film, it becomes a semiconductor wafer with a protective film by hardening the protective film forming film, and finally a semiconductor device can be manufactured using the semiconductor wafer with a protective film. Thus, the support sheet in the composite sheet for protective film formation can be utilized as a dicing sheet. Moreover, when the thin film for protective film formation is non-curable, in each of these steps, the thin film for protective film formation can be used as it is and handled as a protective film.

另一方面,保護膜形成用薄膜在不與支撐片一體化的狀態,被貼附在半導體晶圓背面後,是將支撐片貼附在該保護膜形成用薄膜之與半導體晶圓的貼附面為相反側的露出面。之後,藉由使用與上述保護膜形成用複合片時相同方法,能夠得到附保護膜的半導體晶片或附保護膜形成用薄膜的半導體晶片且能夠製造半導體裝置。此時,保護膜形成用薄膜在未與支撐片一體化的狀態下被貼附在半導體晶圓背面,但是藉由在貼附後與支撐片一體化而構成保護膜形成用複合片。On the other hand, after the protective film forming film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in a state where it is not integrated with the support sheet, the support sheet is attached to the semiconductor wafer after the protective film forming film is attached. The surface is the exposed surface of the opposite side. Thereafter, by using the same method as in the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film, a semiconductor wafer with a protective film or a semiconductor wafer with a thin film for forming a protective film can be obtained, and a semiconductor device can be manufactured. At this time, the thin film for protective film formation is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer without being integrated with the support sheet, but the composite sheet for protective film formation is constituted by integrating with the support sheet after attachment.

作為此種保護膜形成用複合片,例如已揭示一種切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜,是具備:切割膠帶(支撐片),其具有凹凸加工面之基材及積層在該基材的前述凹凸加工面側之黏著劑層;及半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用薄膜),其積層在該切割膠帶的黏著劑層上之切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜;前述切割膠帶的霧度為45%以下(參照專利文獻1)。As such a composite sheet for forming a protective film, for example, a dicing tape-integrated film for protecting the back surface of a semiconductor has been disclosed. Adhesive layer on the concave-convex processed surface side; and a film for semiconductor back protection (film for forming a protective film), a dicing tape-integrated semiconductor back protection film laminated on the adhesive layer of the dicing tape; fog of the aforementioned dicing tape The degree is 45% or less (see Patent Document 1).

但是在專利文獻1揭示之保護膜形成用複合片(切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜),藉由將黏著劑層積層在基材的凹凸加工面側,有黏著劑無法充分地追隨基材的凹凸、且在基材與黏著劑之間產生該等未被貼合的區域(非貼合區域)之情形。又,在保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜之黏著劑層側的面,有藉由雷射照射而進行印字之情形,但是由於黏著劑層的凹凸形狀致使透過基材及黏著劑層之印字的視認性有低落之情形。 [先前技術文獻] [專利文獻]However, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film disclosed in Patent Document 1 (dicing tape-integrated film for protecting the back surface of a semiconductor), the adhesive cannot sufficiently follow the substrate by laminating the adhesive on the uneven surface side of the substrate. unevenness, and these unbonded regions (non-bonded regions) are generated between the base material and the adhesive. Also, on the surface of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film on the side of the adhesive layer, printing may be performed by laser irradiation, but due to the irregular shape of the adhesive layer, the printing through the base material and the adhesive layer may not be possible. Visibility is reduced. [Prior Art Literature] [Patent Document]

[專利文獻1] 日本特許第5432853號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 5432853

發明欲解決之課題The problem to be solved by the invention

本發明之目的提供一種支撐片、及具備前述支撐片之保護膜形成用複合片,該支撐片是在基材的凹凸面側具備黏著劑層而構成之支撐片,在該黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜之保護膜形成用複合片,能夠實現基材與黏著劑的良好密著性,及透過保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的支撐片之良好的印字視認性。 用以解決課題之手段The object of the present invention is to provide a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film provided with the above-mentioned support sheet. The protective film forming composite sheet of the protective film forming film can achieve good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive, and good printing visibility through the protective film or the support sheet of the protective film forming film. means to solve problems

本發明提供一種支撐片,其具備基材,且在該基材上具備黏著劑層之支撐片,前述基材之前述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面,從前述支撐片的5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片觀察前述黏著劑層的剖面時,(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向之直線距離)之比的平均值為1.5以上且小於5.0。The present invention provides a support sheet comprising a base material and an adhesive layer on the base material, wherein the surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface, and is cut from 5 places of the support sheet for testing. When observing the cross-section of the aforementioned adhesive layer on these 5 test pieces, the average ratio of (the sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(the straight-line distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer) The value is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0.

在本發明的支撐片,前述黏著劑層亦可與前述基材的凹凸面直接接觸。 又,本發明提供一種保護膜形成用複合片,其在前述支撐片中的黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜。 發明效果In the support sheet of the present invention, the aforementioned adhesive layer may also be in direct contact with the concave-convex surface of the aforementioned substrate. Moreover, this invention provides the composite sheet for protective film formation provided with the thin film for protective film formation on the adhesive agent layer in the said support sheet. Invention effect

藉由使用本發明的支撐片而構成保護膜形成用複合片,能夠實現基材與黏著劑的良好密著性,以及透過保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的支撐片之良好的印字視認性。By constituting the composite sheet for protective film formation using the support sheet of the present invention, good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive, and good visibility of printed characters through the support sheet through the protective film or the film for protective film formation can be achieved.

用以實施發明之形態form for carrying out the invention

◇支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片 本發明之一實施形態的支撐片是具備基材,且在前述基材上具備黏著劑層之支撐片,前述基材之前述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面,從前述支撐片的5處切取試驗片且在該等5片試驗片觀察前述黏著劑層的剖面時,(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向之直線距離)之比的平均值(在本說明書,有稱為「R值」之情形)為1.5以上且小於5.0。◇Composite sheet for support sheet and protective film formation A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet having a base material and an adhesive layer on the base material. The surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface. When the test pieces are cut and the cross-section of the aforementioned adhesive layer is observed on these 5 test pieces, the ratio of (total linear distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(straight-line distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer) The average value (in this specification, there is a case called "R value") is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0.

又,在本說明書,觀察黏著劑層的剖面時,黏著劑層之基材側的面從下降轉變成為上升之凸部的頂部、與黏著劑層之基材側的面從上升轉變成為下降之凹部的最深部之間的段差為1μm以上時,將該段差視為有意義,而且將具有該有意義的段差之前述頂部特定為凸部之有意義的頂點,且將具有該有意義的段差之前述最深部特定為凹部之有意義的頂點,該等凸部之有意義的頂點及凹部之有意義的頂點之中,將相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間以直線連接而成之距離定義為「相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離」,且將觀察對象之相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離的合計定義為「相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計」。又,將觀察對象之有意義的頂點投影至對黏著劑層為水平方向的平面而成之點之起始點起算至終點為止的距離,定義為「對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離」。Also, in this specification, when the cross section of the adhesive layer is observed, the surface of the adhesive layer on the substrate side changes from descending to rising at the top of the convex portion, and the surface of the adhesive layer on the substrate side changes from ascending to descending. When the step difference between the deepest parts of the concave part is 1 μm or more, the step difference is considered to be meaningful, and the aforementioned apex having the meaningful step difference is specified as a meaningful vertex of the convex part, and the aforementioned deepest part having the meaningful step difference Specific to the meaningful vertices of the concave part, among the meaningful vertices of the convex part and the meaningful vertices of the concave part, the distance between the adjacent meaningful vertices connected by a straight line is defined as "the distance between the adjacent meaningful vertices The straight-line distance between”, and the sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices of the observation object is defined as the “total of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices”. In addition, the distance from the start point to the end point of the projected meaningful vertex of the observation object to the point formed by the plane horizontal to the adhesive layer is defined as "straight-line distance horizontal to the adhesive layer".

觀察前述黏著劑層剖面時,藉由(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離)之比的平均值(R值)為1.5以上,基材與黏著劑與密著性變為良好。藉由R值為小於5.0,能夠抑制透射光在黏著劑-基材界面的散射,而且能夠實現透過保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的支撐片之良好的印字視認性。When the cross section of the adhesive layer is observed, the average value (R value) of the ratio of (the sum of the linear distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(the linear distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer) is 1.5 or more , Substrate and adhesive and adhesion become good. When the R value is less than 5.0, scattering of transmitted light at the adhesive-substrate interface can be suppressed, and good visibility of printed characters transmitted through the protective film or the support sheet of the film for protective film formation can be realized.

本發明之一實施形態的支撐片是具備基材、且在前述基材上具備黏著劑層之支撐片,前述基材之前述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面,從前述支撐片的5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片各自求取黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,較佳是前述最小值的平均值(在本說明書,有稱為「S值」之情形)為1.5μm以上且前述最大值的平均值(在本說明書,有稱為「L值」之情形)為9μm以下。 又,本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片是在前述支撐片中的黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜。A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet having a base material and an adhesive layer on the base material. The surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface. Cut the test pieces, and when the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer are calculated for each of the five test pieces, it is preferable to be the average value of the above-mentioned minimum value (in this manual, there is a case called "S value") ) is 1.5 μm or more and the average value of the aforementioned maximum values (in this specification, sometimes referred to as “L value”) is 9 μm or less. Moreover, the composite sheet for protective film formation which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is equipped with the thin film for protective film formation on the adhesive agent layer in the said support sheet.

又,藉由前述黏著劑層的S值為1.5μm以上,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性容易變為良好。在本說明書,所謂「積層性」,只要未特別限定,就是意味著對象之2層的積層狀態的正常度。所謂「積層性為良好」,意味著例如對象之相鄰2層之間完全沒有非貼合區域(空隙部)、或非貼合區域的數目為較少,且非貼合區域的層間距離為較小。 另一方面,藉由前述黏著劑層的L值為9μm以下,保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜之透過支撐片的印字視認性容易變為良好。Moreover, since the S value of the said adhesive layer is 1.5 micrometers or more, lamination|stackability of an adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation becomes favorable easily. In this specification, "lamination property" means the normality of the lamination state of the two layers of the object, unless otherwise specified. The so-called "good lamination" means that, for example, there is no non-bonding area (gap) between two adjacent layers of the object, or the number of non-bonding areas is small, and the interlayer distance of the non-bonding area is smaller. On the other hand, when the L value of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the visibility of printed characters through the support sheet of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film tends to become good.

前述試驗片是從支撐片的5處切取得到之物,且將支撐片在其厚度方向的全域切斷而得到之物。試驗片為具備構成支撐片的全層之細片。The aforementioned test piece was cut out from five places of the support sheet, and the support sheet was cut in the entire thickness direction thereof. The test piece is a fine piece having all the layers constituting the support piece.

試驗片的大小沒有特別限定,構成試驗片之各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面的1邊之長度,以2mm以上為佳。藉由使用此種大小的試驗片,能夠更高精確度地求取黏著劑層的R值、S值及L值。 前述1邊的長度之最大值沒有特別限定。例如從試驗片的製造較容易的觀點而言,前述1邊的長度以10mm以下為佳。The size of the test piece is not particularly limited, and the length of one side of the laminated surface or the exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is preferably 2 mm or more. By using a test piece of such a size, the R value, the S value, and the L value of the adhesive layer can be calculated|required more accurately. The maximum value of the length of one side is not particularly limited. For example, the length of one side is preferably 10 mm or less from the viewpoint of easier production of the test piece.

試驗片的平面形狀、亦即構成試驗片之各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面的形狀,以多角形狀為佳,從試驗片的切取較容易的觀點而言,以四角形狀為較佳。The planar shape of the test piece, that is, the shape of the laminated surface or the exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece, is preferably a polygonal shape. A square shape is preferred.

作為較佳的試驗片,例如可舉出構成試驗片之各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面之大小為3mm×3mm的四角形狀之物。但是這是較佳試驗片的一個例子。As a preferable test piece, for example, a laminated layer or an exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece has a quadrangular shape of 3 mm×3 mm. But this is an example of a better test piece.

在支撐片之試驗片的5處切取位置沒有特別限定,能夠以可更高精確度地求取黏著劑層的R值、S值及L值之方式,考慮後述保護膜形成用薄膜的預定積層位置而選擇。 例如可舉出,在支撐片之預定積層1片保護膜形成用薄膜的位置之中,預定配置保護膜形成用薄膜之中心(重心)部之1處;及預定配置靠近保護膜形成用薄膜的周緣部之部位,且對該中心(重心)部為大致點對稱的位置之4處;共計5處。The cutting positions of the five test pieces of the support sheet are not particularly limited, and the R value, S value, and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy, taking into account the planned layering of the film for protective film formation described later. selected by location. For example, among the positions where one film for forming a protective film is to be stacked on the support sheet, one of the centers (centers of gravity) of the film for forming a protective film is planned to be arranged; The peripheral part, and the 4 places that are roughly point-symmetrical to the central (center of gravity) part; a total of 5 places.

在支撐片,試驗片的切取位置與中心(重心)之間的距離,以50~200mm為佳。藉此,能夠更高精確度地求取黏著劑層的R值、S值及L值。On the support piece, the distance between the cutting position of the test piece and the center (center of gravity) is preferably 50~200mm. Thereby, the R value, the S value, and the L value of an adhesive layer can be calculated|required more accurately.

為了從試驗片求取黏著劑層的R值,在試驗片新形成剖面,在該形成的剖面,各試驗片都是測定相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計,以及對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離。 新形成的剖面,每1片試驗片可只有1面,亦可為2面以上,通常只有1面就充分。 而且能夠從該等至少5個相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計、及對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離算出R值即可。In order to obtain the R value of the adhesive layer from the test piece, a new cross-section is formed on the test piece. In the formed cross-section, each test piece measures the sum of the linear distances between adjacent meaningful vertices, and the value of the adhesive layer. The level is the linear distance in the horizontal direction. For the newly formed section, each test piece may have only one side or more than two sides, and usually only one side is sufficient. Furthermore, the R value may be calculated from the sum of the linear distances between the at least five adjacent meaningful vertices and the linear distance in the horizontal direction with respect to the adhesive layer.

為了從試驗片求取黏著劑層的S值及L值,在試驗片新形成剖面且在該形成的剖面,各試驗片都是測定黏著劑層的厚度之最小值及最大值。 新形成的剖面,每1片試驗片可只有1面,亦可為2面以上,通常只有1面就充分。 而且,能夠從該等至少5個最小值及最大值算出S值及L值即可。In order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer from the test piece, a cross section was newly formed on the test piece, and the minimum value and the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer were measured for each test piece on the formed cross section. For the newly formed section, each test piece may have only one side or more than two sides, and usually only one side is sufficient. And it is sufficient that the S value and the L value can be calculated from these at least five minimum values and maximum values.

試驗片能夠使用習知的方法形成剖面。例如,能夠藉由使用習知的剖面試料製造裝置(剖面研磨機(Cross-section Polisher)),而能夠抑制偏差且以較高的再現性在試驗片形成剖面。The cross section of the test piece can be formed by a known method. For example, by using a known cross-section sample manufacturing device (cross-section polisher), it is possible to form a cross-section on a test piece with high reproducibility while suppressing variations.

黏著劑層之相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計,以及對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離,例如能夠藉由使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM)、將試驗片的前述剖面進行影像處理來測定。 黏著劑層厚度的最小值及最大值,例如能夠藉由使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察試驗片的前述剖面來測定。The sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent significant vertices of the adhesive layer, and the straight-line distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer, for example, can be imaged by using a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to image the aforementioned cross-section of the test piece processing to measure. The minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of an adhesive layer can be measured, for example by observing the said cross-section of a test piece using a scanning electron microscope (SEM).

在各試驗片的前述剖面,測定相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計、及對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離之區域,較佳是對構成試驗片之各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層方向為正交的方向(對各層的積層面或露出面大致為平行的方向)之50~1500μm的區域。又,從長條支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片切取試驗片時,以在長條支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的寬度方向切取前述剖面為佳。藉此,能夠有效率且高精確度地測定相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計、及對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離。黏著劑層厚度的最小值及最大值之測定亦同樣。 又,R值的算出,作為「相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間之直線距離的合計」,在試驗片的剖面的觀察區域之有意義的頂點彼此之間存在多少組不為定值。例如將試驗片剖面的觀察區域設為1mm的區域時,有意義的頂點彼此之間可為50~500組,亦可為75~250組,亦可為100~200組。On the aforementioned cross-section of each test piece, measure the sum of the linear distances between adjacent meaningful vertices and the area of the linear distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer, preferably for each layer (substrate, substrate, etc.) constituting the test piece The lamination direction of the adhesive layer, etc.) is a region of 50 to 1500 μm in the orthogonal direction (direction approximately parallel to the lamination layer or exposed surface of each layer). Moreover, when cutting out the test piece from the elongate support sheet and the composite sheet for protective film formation, it is preferable to cut the said cross-section in the width direction of the elongate support sheet and the composite sheet for protective film formation. Thereby, the total of the linear distances between adjacent significant vertices and the linear distance in the horizontal direction with respect to the adhesive layer can be measured efficiently and with high accuracy. The same applies to the determination of the minimum and maximum values of the thickness of the adhesive layer. In addition, the calculation of the R value is not a fixed value as "the sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices" and how many sets of meaningful vertices exist between the observation regions of the cross section of the test piece. For example, when the observation area of the cross-section of the test piece is set to an area of 1 mm, there may be 50 to 500 sets of meaningful vertices, 75 to 250 sets, or 100 to 200 sets of each other.

在未構成保護膜形成用複合片之階段的支撐片、與構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片之間,切取試驗片且將黏著劑層之基材側的面的(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離)之比的平均值(R值)進行比較時,該等R值為互相相同、或是在構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片的前述R值為稍微變小之程度,即便如此變小時,其差為能夠忽視的程度。Between the support sheet at the stage where the composite sheet for protective film formation is not formed and the support sheet that constitutes the composite sheet for protective film formation, a test piece is cut out and the surface of the adhesive layer on the base material side (adjacent meaningful When comparing the average value (R value) of the ratio (the sum of the straight-line distances between vertices)/(the straight-line distance in the horizontal direction to the adhesive layer), these R values are the same as each other, or when the protective The said R value of the support sheet of the composite sheet for film formation becomes a little small, and even if it becomes small, the difference is negligible.

在未構成保護膜形成用複合片之階段的支撐片、與構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片之間,將黏著劑層的厚度的最小值進行比較時,該等最小值為互相相同、或是在構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片的前述最小值為稍微變小之程度,即便如此變小時,其差為能夠忽視的程度。 針對黏著劑層的厚度的最大值亦相同。亦即,在未構成保護膜形成用複合片之階段的支撐片、與構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片之間,將黏著劑層的厚度的最大值進行比較時,該等最大值為互相相同、或是在構成了保護膜形成用複合片之支撐片的前述最大值為稍微變小之程度,即便如此變小時,其差為能夠忽視的程度。 因而,亦可不是從支撐片,而是使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,且使用與從支撐片切取試驗片時相同方法而求取R值,黏著劑層的S值及L值。如此地使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片時,R值為1.5以上且小於5.0時,該保護膜形成用複合片能夠反映上述本發明的效果。When comparing the minimum values of the thickness of the adhesive layer between the support sheet at the stage not constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the minimum values are the same , or the above-mentioned minimum value of the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for protective film formation is slightly smaller, and even if it is smaller, the difference is negligible. The same applies to the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer. That is, when the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet at the stage not constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the maximum value They are the same as each other, or the above-mentioned maximum value of the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for protective film formation is slightly smaller, and even if it is smaller, the difference is negligible. Therefore, instead of the support sheet, a test piece cut out from the protective film forming composite sheet may be used, and the R value, the S value and the L value of the adhesive layer may be obtained using the same method as when the test piece is cut from the support sheet. value. When the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation is used in this way, when the R value is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0, the composite sheet for protective film formation can reflect the effect of this invention mentioned above.

亦即,本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,是在前述支撐片中的黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜之保護膜形成用複合片,從前述保護膜形成用複合片的5處切取試驗片,且在該等5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層的剖面時,(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離)之比的平均值(R值)為1.5以上且小於5.0。That is, a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is a composite sheet for forming a protective film provided with a thin film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer of the support sheet. Cut the test pieces at 5 locations, and observe the cross-section of the adhesive layer on these 5 test pieces, (the sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(the straight-line distance in the horizontal direction of the adhesive layer ) ratio (R value) is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0.

同樣地,不是未構成保護膜形成用複合片的階段之支撐片,亦可使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片且藉由與使用從支撐片切取的試驗片時相同方法,求取黏著劑層的S值及L值。如此地使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切取的試驗片時,黏著劑層的S值為1.5μm以上、黏著劑層的L值為9μm以下時,該保護膜形成用複合片容易反映上述本發明的效果。Similarly, instead of the support sheet at the stage that does not constitute the composite sheet for protective film formation, a test piece cut from the composite sheet for protective film formation can also be used, and by the same method as when using a test piece cut from the support sheet, the The S value and L value of the adhesive layer. When using the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation in this way, when the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more and the L value of the adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the composite sheet for protective film formation is likely to reflect the above-mentioned principle. The effect of the invention.

亦即,本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片是在前述支撐片中的黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜之保護膜形成用複合片,從前述保護膜形成用複合片的5處切取試驗片,且在該等5片試驗片各自求取黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,較佳是前述最小值的平均值(S值)為1.5μm以上,且前述最大值的平均值(L值)為9μm以下。That is, the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is a composite sheet for forming a protective film provided with a thin film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer of the support sheet. The test pieces are cut at 5 places, and when the minimum value and the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer are obtained for each of the 5 test pieces, it is preferable that the average value (S value) of the above-mentioned minimum value is 1.5 μm or more, and the above-mentioned The average value (L value) of the maximum value is 9 μm or less.

又,從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,是將保護膜形成用複合片在其厚度方向的全域切斷而得到之物,且具備構成保護膜形成用複合片的全層之細片。In addition, the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation is obtained by cutting the composite sheet for protective film formation in its entire thickness direction, and has fine pieces constituting all layers of the composite sheet for protective film formation. .

以下,邊參照圖式邊說明本發明的保護膜形成用複合片的全體之構成。又,在以下說明所使用的圖示,為了容易理解本發明的特徵,有將重要部份之部分放大而顯示之情形,且各構成要素的尺寸比率等不限於與實際為相同。Hereinafter, the overall structure of the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention is demonstrated, referring drawings. In addition, in the drawings used in the following description, in order to easily understand the characteristics of the present invention, important parts may be enlarged and displayed, and the dimensional ratio of each component is not limited to be the same as the actual one.

第1圖示意性地顯示本發明之一實施形態的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之剖面圖。 在此顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1A具備基材11,且在基材11上具備黏著劑層12,而且黏著劑層12上具備保護膜形成用薄膜13。支撐片10是基材11與黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1A,換言之,具有在支撐片10的一面(在本說明書,有稱為「第1面」之情形)10a上積層有保護膜形成用薄膜13之構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1A進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜13上具備剝離膜15。Fig. 1 schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown here is provided with the base material 11, and the adhesive agent layer 12 is provided on the base material 11, and the film 13 for protective film formation is provided on the adhesive agent layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, in other words, has one side (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "the first side") 10a on the support sheet 10 The upper buildup layer has a film 13 for forming a protective film. Moreover, 1 A of composite sheets for protective film formation are equipped with the peeling film 15 on the film 13 for protective film formation further.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,在基材11的一面(在本說明書,有稱為「第1面」之情形)11a積層有黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12之與基材11側為相反側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第1面」之情形)12a的全面積層有保護膜形成用薄膜13,在保護膜形成用薄膜13之與黏著劑層12側為相反側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第1面」之情形)13a的一部分,亦即周緣部附近的區域積層有治具用接著劑層16,在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a之中未積層有治具用接著劑層16之面、及治具用接著劑層16之未與保護膜形成用薄膜13接觸之16a(上面及側面)積層有剝離膜15。 又,第1圖中,符號13b表示保護膜形成用薄膜13之黏著劑層12側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第2面」之情形)。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on one side (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "the first side") 11a of the base material 11, and on the side of the adhesive layer 12 and the base material 11 The film 13 for forming a protective film is layered on the entire surface of the surface (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "the first surface") 12a on the opposite side, and the film 13 for forming a protective film is on the side opposite to the side of the adhesive layer 12. (In this specification, it may be referred to as "the first surface") 13a, that is, the area near the peripheral part is laminated with the jig adhesive layer 16, and on the first surface of the protective film forming film 13 The peeling film 15 is laminated on the surface of 13a on which the adhesive layer 16 for jigs is not laminated, and 16a (top and side surfaces) of the adhesive layer 16 for jigs that is not in contact with the film 13 for forming a protective film. Moreover, in FIG. 1, the code|symbol 13b has shown the surface (in this specification, it may be called a "2nd surface" the case of the adhesive agent layer 12 side of the film 13 for protective film formation).

治具用接著劑層16,例如亦可為含有接著劑成分之單層結構,亦可在芯材之薄片的兩面積層有含接著劑成分之層之複數層結構之物。The adhesive layer 16 for jigs may have, for example, a single-layer structure containing an adhesive component, or a multi-layer structure in which layers containing an adhesive component are layered on both sides of the core sheet.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,基材11的第1面11a為凹凸面。 又,黏著劑層12設置為直接接觸基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a。因此黏著劑層12之基材11側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第2面」之情形)12b為凹凸面。In 1A of composite sheets for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven|corrugated surface. Moreover, the adhesive layer 12 is provided so that it may directly contact the 1st surface (concave-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 on the side of the base material 11 (in this specification, it may be referred to as a "second surface") 12b is a concave-convex surface.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,基材11之與黏著劑層12側為相反側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第2面」之情形)11b可為凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面、光澤面)的任一者,以平滑面為佳。基材11的第2面11b亦可以說是支撐片10之與保護膜形成用薄膜13側為相反側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第2面」之情形)10b。隨後詳細地說明「凹凸面」、「平滑面」。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the surface 11b of the substrate 11 opposite to the side of the adhesive layer 12 (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "the second surface") 11b may be a concave-convex surface and a smooth surface (not uneven surface, glossy surface), preferably a smooth surface. The 2nd surface 11b of the base material 11 can also be said to be the surface (it may be called "2nd surface" in this specification) 10b of the support sheet 10 on the side opposite to the protective film forming film 13 side. The "uneven surface" and "smooth surface" will be described in detail later.

第1圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1A,是在經除去剝離膜15的狀態下將半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面貼附在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a,而且,治具用接著劑層16的面16a之中的上面、被貼附在環狀框等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1, the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the first surface 13a of the film 13 for forming a protective film in a state where the release film 15 has been removed, and , the upper surface of the surface 16a of the adhesive layer 16 for the jig is used by being attached to a jig such as a ring frame.

第2圖同時示意性顯示本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片及支撐片之剖面圖。 又,在第2圖以後的圖,與已經說明完畢的圖示顯示之物為相同構成要素,給予與該說明完畢的圖示相同符號且省略其詳細的說明。Fig. 2 schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. In addition, in the figures after the 2nd figure, the thing shown in the illustration which has already been explained is the same component element, and the same code|symbol as the said illustration which has been explained is given, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

在此顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1B,除了未具備治具用接著劑層16之點以外,與第1圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1A相同。亦即,在保護膜形成用複合片1B,在基材11的第1面11a積層有黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a的全面積層有保護膜形成用薄膜13,而且在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a的全面積層有剝離膜15。The composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 except that it does not include the adhesive layer 16 for jigs. That is, in the protective film forming composite sheet 1B, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11a of the base material 11, and the protective film forming film 13 is laminated on the entire first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12, and The peeling film 15 is laminated|stacked on the whole area of the 1st surface 13a of the film 13 for protective film formation.

在保護膜形成用複合片1B,基材11的第1面11a為凹凸面。 又,黏著劑層12設置為直接接觸基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a。因此黏著劑層12之基材11側的面(第2面)12b為凹凸面。 在保護膜形成用複合片1B,基材11的第2面11b(換言之、支撐片10的第2面10b)亦是凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面)的任一者,以平滑面為佳。In the composite sheet 1B for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven|corrugated surface. Moreover, the adhesive layer 12 is provided so that it may directly contact the 1st surface (concave-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the surface (second surface) 12b on the base material 11 side of the adhesive layer 12 is an uneven surface. In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) is also any one of a rough surface and a smooth surface (non-rough surface). good.

第2圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1B,是在經除去剝離膜15之狀態下,將半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面貼附在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a之中之中央側的一部分區域,而且,周緣部附近的區域被貼附在環狀框等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the first surface 13a of the film 13 for forming a protective film in a state where the release film 15 has been removed. Part of the central area and the area near the peripheral edge are attached to a jig such as a ring frame and used.

第3圖同時示意性顯示本發明之另一其它實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片及支撐片之剖面圖。 在此顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1C,除了保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀不同的點以外,與第2圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1B相同。亦即,保護膜形成用複合片1C具備基材11,在基材11上具備黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12上具備保護膜形成用薄膜23。支撐片10是基材11及黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1C,換言之具有將保護膜形成用薄膜23積層在支撐片10的第1面(保護膜形成用薄膜23側的面)10a上之構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1C進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜23上具備剝離膜15。Fig. 3 also schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to another embodiment of the present invention. The protective film-forming composite sheet 1C shown here is the same as the protective film-forming composite sheet 1B shown in FIG. 2 except that the shape of the protective film-forming film is different. That is, 1 C of composite sheets for protective film formation are provided with the base material 11, the adhesive agent layer 12 is provided on the base material 11, and the film 23 for protective film formation is provided on the adhesive agent layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminated body of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, in other words, has a first surface on which the film 23 for forming a protective film is laminated on the support sheet 10 (on the side of the film 23 for forming a protective film). The composition on the face) 10a. Moreover, 1 C of composite sheets for protective film formation are equipped with the peeling film 15 on the film 23 for protective film formation further.

在保護膜形成用複合片1C,將黏著劑層12積層在基材11的第1面11a,且將保護膜形成用薄膜23積層在黏著劑層12的第1面12a的一部分、亦即中央側的區域。而且,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之中未積層有保護膜形成用薄膜23之區域,以及保護膜形成用薄膜23之未與黏著劑層12接觸的面23a(上面及側面)之上,積層有剝離膜15。 又,第3圖中,符號23b表示保護膜形成用薄膜23之黏著劑層12側的面(在本說明書,有稱為「第2面」之情形)。In the protective film forming composite sheet 1C, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11a of the base material 11, and the protective film forming film 23 is laminated on a part of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12, that is, the center. side area. In addition, between the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 where the film 23 for forming a protective film is not laminated, and the surface 23a (upper surface and side surfaces) of the film 23 for forming a protective film that is not in contact with the adhesive layer 12 Above, a release film 15 is laminated. Moreover, in FIG. 3, the code|symbol 23b has shown the surface by the side of the adhesive agent layer 12 of the film 23 for protective film formation (in this specification, it may call it a "2nd surface").

從上方朝下俯視保護膜形成用複合片1C時,相較於黏著劑層12的表面積,保護膜形成用薄膜23為較小,例如具有圓形狀等的形狀。When the composite sheet 1C for protective film formation is planarly viewed from above, the thin film 23 for protective film formation is small compared with the surface area of the adhesive agent layer 12, and has shapes, such as a circle shape, for example.

在保護膜形成用複合片1C,基材11的第1面11a為凹凸面。 又,黏著劑層12設置為直接接觸基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a。因此,黏著劑層12之基材11側的面(第2面)12b為凹凸面。 在保護膜形成用複合片1C,基材11的第2面11b(換言之、支撐片10的第2面10b)亦是以凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面)的任一者,以平滑面為佳。In 1C of composite sheets for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven|corrugated surface. Moreover, the adhesive layer 12 is provided so that it may directly contact the 1st surface (concave-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the surface (2nd surface) 12b by the side of the base material 11 of the adhesive layer 12 is an uneven|corrugated surface. In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the substrate 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) is either a concave-convex surface or a smooth surface (non-concave-convex surface). better.

第3圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1C,是在經除去剝離膜15的狀態下,將半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面貼附在保護膜形成用薄膜23的面23a,而且,將黏著劑層12的第1面12a之中之未積層有保護膜形成用薄膜23之區域貼附在環狀框等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3, the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the surface 23a of the film 23 for forming a protective film in a state where the release film 15 has been removed. The region on which the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated among the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 is attached to a jig such as a ring frame and used.

又,在第3圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1C,是在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之中之未積層有保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域,亦可與第1圖顯示之物同樣地積層有治具用接著劑層(未圖示)。此種具備治具用接著劑層之保護膜形成用複合片1C,能夠與第1圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片同樣地將治具用接著劑層的上面貼附在環狀框等的治具而使用。Also, the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3 is an area where the film 23 for forming a protective film is not laminated on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12, and may be the same as that shown in FIG. 1. The adhesive layer (not shown) for jigs is laminated|stacked similarly. Such a composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film having an adhesive layer for a jig can be attached to a ring frame or the like on the upper surface of the adhesive layer for a jig in the same way as the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 . Fixtures are used.

如此地、不管保護膜形成用複合片是支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的何種形態,亦可具備治具用接著劑層。但是通常如第1圖顯示,作為具備治具用接著劑層之保護膜形成用複合片,以在保護膜形成用薄膜上具備治具用接著劑層之物為佳。In this way, regardless of the form of the support sheet and the thin film for protective film formation, the composite sheet for protective film formation may be equipped with the adhesive layer for jigs. However, as shown in FIG. 1 , as the composite sheet for forming a protective film provided with an adhesive layer for a jig, it is preferable to have an adhesive layer for a jig on a film for forming a protective film.

本發明的一實施形態之保護膜形成用複合片不被第1圖~第3圖顯示之物限定,在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可為將第1圖~第3圖顯示之物的一部分構成變更或削除而成之物,以及在至此為止已說明之物進一步追加其它構成而成之物。The composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to what is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, and may be shown in FIGS. A part of the configuration of the thing is changed or removed, and a thing that is further added to the thing that has been described so far.

例如,在第1圖~第3圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片,亦可在基材11與黏著劑層12之間設置有中間層。亦即,在本發明的保護膜形成用複合片,支撐片亦可為基材、中間層及黏著劑層、依照該順序在該等的厚度方向積層而構成。作為中間層,能夠按照目的而選擇任意物。 又,第1圖~第3圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片,亦可在任意處設置有前述中間層以外的層。 而且,在保護膜形成用複合片,亦可在剝離膜與直接接觸該剝離膜之層之間產生一部分的間隙。 而且,在保護膜形成用複合片,各層的大小、形狀能夠按照目的而任意地調節。For example, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 , an intermediate layer may be provided between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 . That is, in the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention, a support sheet may be comprised by laminating|stacking a base material, an intermediate layer, and an adhesive layer in this order in the thickness direction of these. As the intermediate layer, any one can be selected according to the purpose. Moreover, the composite sheet for protective film formation shown in FIG. 1 - FIG. 3 may be provided with the layer other than the said intermediate layer in arbitrary places. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for protective film formation, some gaps may be generated between the release film and the layer directly in contact with the release film. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for protective film formation, the size and shape of each layer can be arbitrarily adjusted according to the purpose.

但是,如第1圖~第3圖顯示,在保護膜形成用複合片,較佳是黏著劑層為直接接觸基材的凹凸面(第1面),換言之,在基材與黏著劑層之間、不具備中間層且黏著劑層直接接觸而積層在基材上。 又,在保護膜形成用複合片,較佳是保護膜形成用薄膜為直接接觸黏著劑層的第1面,換言之,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜之間不具備其它層,且保護膜形成用薄膜為直接接觸而積層在黏著劑層上。 而且,在保護膜形成用複合片更佳是全部滿足此等條件之物,亦即,基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜依照此順序於該等厚度方向、互相直接接觸積層而構成之物。However, as shown in Figures 1 to 3, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the adhesive layer is the uneven surface (first surface) that directly contacts the base material, in other words, between the base material and the adhesive layer. Between, without an intermediate layer, and the adhesive layer is in direct contact and laminated on the substrate. In addition, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the film for forming a protective film is the first surface that directly contacts the adhesive layer, in other words, no other layer is provided between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the protective film is protected. The thin film for film formation is laminated|stacked on the adhesive agent layer for direct contact. Furthermore, the composite sheet for forming a protective film is more preferably one that satisfies all the conditions, that is, the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film are laminated in this order in the thickness direction and directly contact each other. things.

前述支撐片以透明為佳。 支撐片可能夠按照目的而經著色,亦可蒸鍍有其它層。 例如保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性時,支撐片以能夠使能量線透射為佳。The aforementioned supporting sheet is preferably transparent. The support sheet can be optionally colored and can also be vapor-deposited with other layers. For example, when the film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the support sheet can transmit energy ray.

在本說明書,所謂「能量線」,意味著在電磁波或荷電粒子線之中具有能量子之物,作為其例子,可舉出紫外線、放射線、電子射線等。紫外線例如能夠藉由使用高壓水銀燈、熔融燈(fusion lamp)、氙燈、黑光(black light)或LED燈等作為紫外線源而照射。電子射線能夠藉由電子射線加速器等而產生之物。 在本說明書,所謂「能量線硬化性」,意味著藉由照射能量線而硬化之性質,所謂「非能量線硬化性」意味著即便照射能量線亦不硬化的性質。In the present specification, the term "energy ray" means something having energy quanta among electromagnetic waves or charged particle rays, and examples thereof include ultraviolet rays, radiation rays, electron rays, and the like. Ultraviolet rays can be irradiated by using, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp, a fusion lamp, a xenon lamp, a black light, an LED lamp, or the like as an ultraviolet light source. Electron beams can be generated by electron beam accelerators and the like. In this specification, "energy ray curability" means the property of being cured by irradiation of energy ray, and "non-energy ray curability" means the property of not being cured even when irradiated with energy ray.

支撐片在波長375nm的光線之透射率以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為較佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由前述光的透射率為此種範圍,透過支撐片而對保護膜形成用薄膜照射能量線(紫外線)時,保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化度為進一步提升。 支撐片在波長375nm的光線之透射率的上限值沒有特別限定。例如前述光線的透射率可為95%以下。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 375nm is preferably above 30%, preferably above 50%, and especially preferably above 70%. When the transmittance of the said light is such a range, when the film for protective film formation is irradiated with energy rays (ultraviolet rays) through a support sheet, the degree of hardening of the thin film for protective film formation will be further improved. The upper limit of the transmittance of the support sheet to light with a wavelength of 375 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance may be 95% or less.

支撐片在波長532nm的光線之透射率以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為較佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由前述光線的透射率為此種範圍,透過支撐片而對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在該等進行印字時,能夠更清晰地印字。 支撐片在波長532nm的光線之透射率的上限值沒有特別限定。例如前述光線的透射率可為95%以下。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 532nm is preferably above 30%, preferably above 50%, and especially preferably above 70%. When the light transmittance is in such a range, when printing is performed by irradiating the protective film forming film or the protective film with laser light through the support sheet, it is possible to print more clearly. The upper limit of the transmittance of the support sheet to light with a wavelength of 532 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance may be 95% or less.

支撐片在波長1064nm的光線之透射率以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為較佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由前述光線的透射率為此種範圍,透過支撐片而對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在該等進行印字時,能夠更清晰地印字。 支撐片在波長1064nm的光線之透射率的上限值沒有特別限定。例如前述光線的透射率可為95%以下。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 1064nm is preferably above 30%, preferably above 50%, and especially preferably above 70%. When the light transmittance is in such a range, when printing is performed by irradiating the protective film forming film or the protective film with laser light through the support sheet, it is possible to print more clearly. The upper limit of the transmittance of the support sheet to light with a wavelength of 1064 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance may be 95% or less.

支撐片的透過鮮明度以30以上為佳,以100以上為較佳,以200以上為特佳。藉由前述透過鮮明度為此種範圍,透過支撐片而更容易地確認保護膜形成用薄膜的浮起剝落、印字不良、及缺損等。 支撐片的透過鮮明度沒有特別限定。例如前述透過鮮明度可為430以下。 支撐片的透過鮮明度能夠依據JIS K7374-2007而測定。The transparency of the support sheet is preferably 30 or higher, more preferably 100 or higher, and particularly preferably 200 or higher. When the above-mentioned transmission sharpness is in such a range, it is easier to confirm the floating and peeling of the film for forming a protective film, poor printing, chipping, etc. through the support sheet. The transparency of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the aforementioned transmission clarity may be 430 or less. The transparency of the support sheet can be measured in accordance with JIS K7374-2007.

其次,詳細地說明構成支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之各層。Next, each layer which comprises a support sheet and a composite sheet for protective film formation is demonstrated in detail.

○基材 前述基材為片狀或薄膜狀,且具有凹凸面。○Substrate The aforementioned substrate is in the form of a sheet or a film, and has a concave-convex surface.

在本說明書,所謂「凹凸面」,意味著依照JIS B0601:2013規定的最大高度粗糙度Rz為0.01μm以上之面。 又,所謂「平滑面」意味著不是凹凸面,而為平滑度較高的面,亦有稱為「非凹凸面」或「光澤面」之情形。例如,平滑面包含不符合前述凹凸面的程度之極小凹凸度的面。In this specification, the "uneven surface" means a surface with a maximum height roughness Rz of 0.01 μm or more according to JIS B0601:2013. In addition, the term "smooth surface" means a surface with a high degree of smoothness rather than an uneven surface, and may be called a "non-uneven surface" or a "glossy surface". For example, a smooth surface includes a surface with extremely small unevenness to such a degree that it does not correspond to the above-mentioned uneven surface.

在基材,可只有一面為凹凸面,亦可為兩面均是凹凸面,以只有一面為凹凸面為佳。換言之,在前述基材,以只有一面為平滑面為佳。在支撐片,基材的凹凸面成為具備黏著劑層之側的面。In the substrate, only one side may be concave-convex, or both sides may be concave-convex, and only one side is preferably concave-convex. In other words, it is preferable that only one side of the substrate is smooth. In the support sheet, the concave-convex surface of the base material becomes the surface on the side provided with the adhesive layer.

基材可由1層(單層)所構成之物,亦可為由2層以上的複數層所構成之物,由複數層所構成時,該等複數層可互相相同亦可不同,該等複數層的組合沒有特別限定。 基材由複數層由所構成時,該等複數層之中的最外層的面(最接近黏著劑層的面、或最接近黏著劑層的面及最遠的面之兩面)成為前述凹凸面。The base material may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When composed of multiple layers, the multiple layers may be the same as or different from each other. The combination of layers is not particularly limited. When the base material is composed of multiple layers, the surface of the outermost layer among the multiple layers (the surface closest to the adhesive layer, or both sides of the surface closest to the adhesive layer and the farthest surface) becomes the aforementioned concave-convex surface .

在本說明書,不限定於基材的情況,所謂「複數層可互相相同亦可不同」,意味著「全部的層可相同,全部的層亦可不同,且亦可只有一部分的層為相同」,而且所謂「複數層為互相不同」,意味著「各層的構成材料及厚度的至少一者為互相不同」。In this specification, not limited to the case of the substrate, the phrase "a plurality of layers may be the same or different" means "all the layers may be the same, all the layers may be different, and only some of the layers may be the same." , and "the plurality of layers are different from each other" means "at least one of the constituent materials and thickness of each layer is different from each other".

在基材之具備黏著劑層之側的凹凸面(第1面),基材的R值以1.3以上且小於4.8為佳。以1.5以上為佳,以1.7以上為較佳,例如可為2.1以上、2.5以上、2.8以上、及3.3以上的任一者。藉由前述基材的R值為前述下限值以上,能夠良好地調整黏著劑的R值。在此,所謂基材的R值,意味著從基材的5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片觀察前述基材的剖面時,(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對基材為水平方向的直線距離)之比的平均值。On the concave-convex surface (first surface) on the side having the adhesive layer of the substrate, the R value of the substrate is preferably 1.3 or more and less than 4.8. It is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 1.7 or more, for example, it may be any one of 2.1 or more, 2.5 or more, 2.8 or more, and 3.3 or more. When the R value of the said base material is more than the said lower limit, the R value of an adhesive agent can be adjusted favorably. Here, the so-called R value of the base material means that test pieces are cut from 5 places of the base material, and when the cross-section of the aforementioned base material is observed on these 5 test pieces, (the linear distance between adjacent meaningful vertices The average value of the ratio of total)/(straight-line distance in the horizontal direction to the substrate).

又,在基材之具備黏著劑層之側的凹凸面(第1面),依據JIS B0601:2013而測定的最大高度粗糙度(Rz)以0.01~8μm為佳,以0.1~7μm為較佳,以0.5~6μm為特佳。藉由基材的前述Rz為前述下限值以上,能夠抑制將基材單獨捲取成為捲物狀、或捲出時所產生的不良。而且,在支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的製造過程,針對含有基材之積層物,亦同樣地能夠抑制在捲取、捲出時所產生的不良。另一方面,藉由基材的前述Rz為前述上限值以下,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜之透過支撐片的印字視認性均變為良好。In addition, the maximum height roughness (Rz) measured in accordance with JIS B0601:2013 on the concave-convex surface (first surface) on the side with the adhesive layer of the base material is preferably 0.01~8μm, more preferably 0.1~7μm , preferably 0.5~6μm. When said Rz of a base material is more than the said lower limit value, the defect which arises when a base material is individually wound up into a roll shape, or is unwound can be suppressed. In addition, in the production process of the support sheet or the composite sheet for protective film formation, it is also possible to suppress defects occurring at the time of winding up and unwinding of the laminate including the base material. On the other hand, when the Rz of the base material is not more than the above upper limit, the laminarity of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the visibility of the printed characters through the support sheet of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film are all changed. for good.

基材的兩面均為凹凸面時,該等兩面的凹凸度可互相相同亦可不同。When both surfaces of the substrate are concave-convex, the concave-convex degrees of the two surfaces may be the same or different from each other.

作為前述基材的構成材料,例如可舉出各種樹脂。 作為前述樹脂,例如可舉出低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)、直鏈低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)等的聚乙烯;聚丙烯、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚甲基戊烯、降莰烯樹脂等的聚乙烯以外的聚烯烴;乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、乙烯-降莰烯共聚物等的乙烯系共聚物(亦即使用乙烯作為單體而得到的共聚物);聚氯乙烯、氯乙烯共聚物等的氯化乙烯系樹脂(亦即使用氯乙烯作為單體而得到的樹脂);聚苯乙烯;聚環烯烴;聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯、聚間苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚乙烯-2,6-萘二羧酸酯、具有全部的結構單元為芳香族環式基之全芳香族聚酯等的聚酯;2種以上的前述聚酯之共聚物;聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚氨酯;聚氨酯丙烯酸酯;聚醯亞胺;聚醯胺;聚碳酸酯;氟樹脂;聚縮醛;改質聚苯醚;聚苯硫(polyphenylene sulfide);聚碸;聚醚酮等。 又,作為前述樹脂,例如亦可舉出前述聚酯與此等以外的樹脂之混合物等的聚合物摻合物(polymer alloy)。前述聚酯與此等以外的樹脂之聚合物摻合物,以聚酯以外的樹脂之量為較少量之物為佳。 而且,作為前述樹脂,例如亦可舉出至此為止已例示的前述樹脂之1種或2種以上交聯而成之交聯樹脂;及使用至此為止已例示的前述樹脂的1種或2種以上之離子聚合物等的改質樹脂。As a constituent material of the said base material, various resins are mentioned, for example. Examples of the aforementioned resin include polyethylene such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE), and high-density polyethylene (HDPE); polypropylene, polybutene, polybutadiene, Polyolefins other than polyethylene such as polymethylpentene and norbornene resin; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylate copolymer, ethylene- Ethylene-based copolymers such as norbornene copolymers (that is, copolymers obtained by using ethylene as a monomer); chlorinated vinyl resins such as polyvinyl chloride and vinyl chloride copolymers (that is, copolymers obtained by using vinyl chloride as a monomer obtained resin); polystyrene; polycycloolefin; polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polyethylene Polyesters such as ethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylates and wholly aromatic polyesters whose structural units are aromatic ring groups; copolymers of two or more of the aforementioned polyesters; poly(methyl) Acrylic ester; polyurethane; polyurethane acrylate; polyimide; polyamide; polycarbonate; fluororesin; polyacetal; modified polyphenylene ether; polyphenylene sulfide; . Moreover, as said resin, the polymer blend (polymer alloy) of the mixture of the said polyester and these other resins etc. is also mentioned, for example. The above-mentioned polymer blend of polyester and other resins is preferably one in which the amount of resins other than polyester is relatively small. Furthermore, as the above-mentioned resin, for example, a cross-linked resin obtained by cross-linking one or two or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far; Modified resins such as ionic polymers.

在本說明書,所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸」,設為包含「丙烯酸」及「甲基丙烯酸」的雙方之概念。針對與(甲基)丙烯酸類似的用語亦相同。例如,所謂「(甲基)丙烯醯基」,包含「丙烯醯基」及「甲基丙烯醯基」之雙方的概念,所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」包含「丙烯酸酯」及「甲基丙烯酸酯」之雙方的概念。In this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" is used as a concept including both "acrylic acid" and "methacrylic acid". The same applies to terms similar to (meth)acrylic acid. For example, the so-called "(meth)acryl" includes the concepts of both "acryl" and "methacryl", and the so-called "(meth)acrylate" includes "acrylate" and "methacryl". The concept of both sides of acrylate.

構成基材之樹脂可只有1種亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The resin constituting the base material may be only one kind or two or more kinds, and when there are two or more kinds, the combinations and ratios thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

基材的厚度以50~300μm的範圍內為佳,以60~150μm的範圍內為較佳。藉由基材的厚度為此種範圍內,前述保護膜形成用複合片的可撓性,及對半導體晶圓或半導體晶片之貼附性為進一步提升。 因為基材如上述具有凹凸面,所以其厚度依照基材的部位而變動。因而,基材的厚度的最小值可為前述下限值以上,基材的厚度的最大值可為前述上限值以下。 又,所謂「基材的厚度」,意味著基材全體的厚度,例如,由複數層所構成的基材之厚度,意味著構成基材之全部層的合計厚度。The thickness of the substrate is preferably within a range of 50 to 300 μm, more preferably within a range of 60 to 150 μm. When the thickness of the base material falls within such a range, the flexibility of the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the adhesion to a semiconductor wafer or a semiconductor wafer are further improved. Since the substrate has uneven surfaces as described above, its thickness varies depending on the location of the substrate. Therefore, the minimum value of the thickness of a base material may be more than the said lower limit, and the maximum value of the thickness of a base material may be below the said upper limit. Also, the "thickness of the substrate" means the thickness of the entire substrate, for example, the thickness of a substrate composed of a plurality of layers means the total thickness of all the layers constituting the substrate.

基材的厚度,例如能夠藉由使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察基材的側面或剖面而測定。 基材的剖面,例如能夠使用與在上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片之剖面時同樣的方法而形成。The thickness of the substrate can be measured, for example, by observing the side or cross section of the substrate using a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross section of the substrate can be formed, for example, by the same method as in the cross section of the test piece of the support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet described above.

例如,與前面已說明的方法同樣地,從支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的複數處(例如5處)切取試驗片,且在該試驗片求取基材厚度的最小值及最大值,而且進一步從該等值求取該等的最小值之平均值及最大值之平均值時,前述最小值的平均值可為上述基材厚度的下限值以上,而前述最大值的平均值可為上述基材厚度的上限值以下。For example, similar to the method described above, a test piece is cut out from multiple places (for example, 5 places) of the composite sheet for forming a support sheet or a protective film, and the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the base material are obtained on the test piece, Furthermore, when calculating the average value of the minimum value and the average value of the maximum value from these equivalent values, the average value of the above-mentioned minimum value may be more than the lower limit value of the above-mentioned substrate thickness, and the average value of the above-mentioned maximum value may be It is not more than the upper limit value of the said base material thickness.

基材除了前述樹脂等主要的構成材料以外,亦可含有填充材、著色劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、有機滑劑、觸媒、軟化劑(可塑劑)等習知的各種添加劑。In addition to the above-mentioned main constituent materials such as resin, the base material may also contain various known additives such as fillers, colorants, antistatic agents, antioxidants, organic lubricants, catalysts, and softeners (plasticizers).

基材以透明為佳。 基材亦可按照目的而經著色,亦可蒸鍍其它層。 例如保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性時,基材以使能量線透射為佳。The substrate is preferably transparent. The substrate can also be colored according to the purpose, and other layers can also be evaporated. For example, when the thin film for protective film formation is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the base material transmits energy ray.

基材為了提升與設置在其上的黏著劑層等直接接觸之層的密著性,亦可為經對表面施行電暈放電處理、電子射線照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧‧紫外線照射處理、火焰處理、鉻酸處理、熱風處理等的氧化處理等而成之物。 又,基材亦可為表面經施行底漆處理之物。 又,基材在重疊抗靜電塗覆層;保護膜形成用複合片而保存時,亦可具有用以防止基材接著在其它片材、基材接著在吸附機台之層等。In order to improve the adhesiveness of the layer directly in contact with the adhesive layer etc. provided thereon, the substrate may be subjected to corona discharge treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, plasma treatment, ozone‧ultraviolet irradiation treatment, Oxidation treatment such as flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment, etc. In addition, the base material may be a surface treated with a primer. In addition, when the substrate is stored with an antistatic coating layer or a composite sheet for forming a protective film, it may also have a layer to prevent the substrate from being attached to another sheet or the substrate to be attached to an adsorption machine.

基材能夠使用習知的方法而製造。例如含有樹脂之基材,能夠藉由將含有前述樹脂的樹脂組合物成形而製造。The substrate can be produced using known methods. For example, a base material containing a resin can be produced by molding a resin composition containing the aforementioned resin.

使用不具有凹凸面的基材(換言之、兩面為平滑面之基材)時,將基材的平滑面進行凹凸化處理。 凹凸化處理能夠使用習知的方法而進行。例如,使用具有凹凸面之金屬輥或金屬板,且藉由將其前述凹凸面往基材的平滑面按壓,而能夠將基材的平滑面凹凸化處理。此時,以將經加熱的狀態之金屬輥或金屬板往基材的平滑面按壓為佳。When using a substrate having no uneven surface (in other words, a substrate having smooth surfaces on both sides), the smooth surface of the substrate is subjected to a roughening treatment. The roughening process can be performed using a known method. For example, the smooth surface of the substrate can be roughened by using a metal roll or metal plate having a concave-convex surface and pressing the concave-convex surface against the smooth surface of the substrate. At this time, it is preferable to press the heated metal roll or metal plate against the smooth surface of the substrate.

例如,除了能夠使用具有不同凹凸之金屬輥而製造具有所需要的凹凸面之基材以外,使用具有相同凹凸之金屬輥,藉由使金屬輥的溫度變化、或使金屬輥之間的間隙間隔變化、變更按壓壓力,亦能夠製造具有所需要的凹凸面之基材。又,基材的平滑面亦能夠藉由噴砂處理、或溶劑處理等而進行凹凸化處理。使用任一方法製造凹凸而成之物均不會對本發明的效果造成影響。For example, in addition to being able to use metal rolls with different concavities and convexities to produce substrates with desired concavo-convex surfaces, using metal rollers with the same concavities and convexities can be achieved by changing the temperature of the metal rollers or making the gap between the metal rollers By changing and changing the pressing pressure, it is also possible to manufacture a base material with the required concave-convex surface. In addition, the smooth surface of the base material can also be roughened by sandblasting, solvent treatment, or the like. The effect of the present invention will not be affected by using any method to produce the concave-convex object.

○黏著劑層 前述黏著劑層為片狀或薄膜狀。 在黏著劑層,通常不管基材與黏著劑層之間有無中間層,受到基材的前述凹凸面的影響,至少基材側的面成為凹凸面。○Adhesive layer The aforementioned adhesive layer is in the form of a sheet or a film. In the adhesive layer, generally, regardless of the presence or absence of an intermediate layer between the base material and the adhesive layer, at least the surface on the base material side becomes an uneven surface due to the influence of the aforementioned uneven surface of the base material.

黏著劑層可為由1層(單層)所構成之物,亦可為由2層以上的複數層所構成之物,由複數層所構成時,該等複數層可互相相同亦可不同,該等複數層的組合沒有特別限定。 黏著劑層由複數層所構成時,該等複數層之中的最外層之面(最靠近基材的面)成為前述凹凸面。The adhesive layer may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When composed of multiple layers, the multiple layers may be the same as or different from each other. The combination of these plural layers is not particularly limited. When the adhesive layer is composed of plural layers, the surface of the outermost layer (the surface closest to the base material) among the plural layers becomes the above-mentioned concave-convex surface.

在此,邊參照圖式邊更詳細地說明基材及黏著劑層。 第4圖示意性地顯示本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片之放大剖面圖。在此,舉出第1圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1A作為例子而進行說明。又,在第4圖省略剝離膜的圖示。Here, the base material and the adhesive layer will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings. Fig. 4 schematically shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Here, the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example and demonstrated. In addition, illustration of the release film is omitted in FIG. 4 .

如前面的說明,基材11的第1面11a為凹凸面。而且,黏著劑層12設置為直接接觸基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a,黏著劑層12的第2面12b容易追隨基材11的第1面11a。因而,黏著劑層12的第2面12b亦成為凹凸面。As described above, the first surface 11a of the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. Furthermore, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in direct contact with the first surface (concave-convex surface) 11 a of the substrate 11 , and the second surface 12 b of the adhesive layer 12 easily follows the first surface 11 a of the substrate 11 . Therefore, the second surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 also becomes an uneven surface.

相鄰有意義的頂點彼此的直線距離不為定值,依照黏著劑層12的部位而變動。在此,將相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離以符號La1 、Lb1 、La2 、Lb2 …表示。又,符號La1 、Lb1 、La2 、Lb2 …表示之線段之中,將符號La1 及Lb1 表示之線段對黏著劑層為水平方向的平面投影而成之線段以L1 表示,將符號La2 及Lb2 表示之線段對黏著劑層為水平方向的平面投影而成之線段以L2 表示。The straight-line distance between adjacent meaningful vertices is not constant, but varies according to the location of the adhesive layer 12 . Here, the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices are represented by symbols L a1 , L b1 , L a2 , L b2 . . . Also, among the line segments represented by symbols L a1 , L b1 , L a2 , L b2 ..., the line segment formed by projecting the line segments represented by symbols L a1 and L b1 onto a plane in which the adhesive layer is horizontal is represented by L 1 , The line segment formed by projecting the line segments represented by symbols L a2 and L b2 on a plane in which the adhesive layer is horizontal is represented by L 2 .

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,從其5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片形成剖面,且在該新形成的剖面,各自求取黏著劑層的全部相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離(上述符號La1 、Lb1 、La2 、Lb2 …)及其間之對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離。而且,算出(全部相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離(上述符號La1 、Lb1 、La2 、Lb2 …之合計))/(對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離(上述符號L1 、L2 …表示之線段長度的合計))之比,從至少5個比之值,求取其平均值(前述R值)時,為1.5以上且小於5.0。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, test pieces were cut out from five places thereof, and cross sections were formed on the five test pieces, and in the newly formed cross sections, the distance between all adjacent meaningful vertices of the adhesive layer was obtained. The linear distance between them (the above symbols L a1 , L b1 , L a2 , L b2 ...) and the linear distance between them are horizontal to the adhesive layer. Then, (the straight-line distance between all adjacent meaningful vertices (the sum of the above symbols L a1 , L b1 , L a2 , L b2 ...))/(the straight-line distance in the horizontal direction with respect to the adhesive layer (the above-mentioned symbol The ratio of the total length of the line segment represented by L 1 , L 2 ...)) is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0 when the average value (the aforementioned R value) is calculated from the values of at least 5 ratios.

第5圖示意性地顯示本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片之放大剖面圖。在此,舉出第1圖顯示之保護膜形成用複合片1A作為例子而進行說明。又,在第5圖省略剝離膜的圖示。Fig. 5 schematically shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Here, the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example and demonstrated. In addition, illustration of the release film is omitted in FIG. 5 .

黏著劑層12的厚度Ta 不為定值,依照黏著劑層12的部位而變動。在此,將黏著劑層12的厚度的最小值以符號Ta1 表示,將黏著劑層12的厚度的最大值以符號Ta2 表示。The thickness T a of the adhesive layer 12 is not constant, but varies according to the location of the adhesive layer 12 . Here, the minimum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by symbol T a1 , and the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by symbol T a2 .

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,從其5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片形成剖面,且在該新形成的剖面,各自求取黏著劑層的厚度的最小值Ta1 及最大值Ta2 。而且,從至少5個Ta1 之值,求取其平均值(前述S值)時,以1.5μm以上為佳、,從至少5個Ta2 之值求取其平均值(前述L值)時,以9μm以下為佳。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, test pieces are cut out from five places thereof, and cross-sections are formed on the five test pieces, and the minimum value T a1 and the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer are obtained for each of the newly formed cross-sections. Value T a2 . Furthermore, when calculating the average value (the aforementioned S value) from at least five T a1 values, it is preferably 1.5 μm or more, and when calculating the average value (the aforementioned L value) from at least five T a2 values , preferably below 9 μm.

從保護膜形成用複合片1A切取試驗片、在試驗片之剖面的形成、測定在前述剖面之黏著劑層的R值、及測定黏著劑層的厚度的最小值Ta1 及最大值Ta2 ,能夠如前面的說明的方式,從未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片切取試驗片的情況同樣地進行。Cut out a test piece from the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, form a section of the test piece, measure the R value of the adhesive layer on the aforementioned section, and measure the minimum value T a1 and maximum value T a2 of the thickness of the adhesive layer, As described above, it can be performed in the same manner as when the test piece is cut out from the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for protective film formation.

又,未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之放大剖面圖,與在第4圖及第5圖中、省略保護膜形成用薄膜13的圖示之物相同。In addition, the enlarged cross-sectional view of the support sheet not constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film is the same as that in which the film 13 for forming a protective film is omitted in FIGS. 4 and 5 .

作為保護膜形成用複合片1A,在此,顯示在基材11與黏著劑層12之間存在此等未被貼合的區域(在本說明書,有稱為「非貼合區域」之情形)91。但是保護膜形成用複合片1A即便具有此種非貼合區域91,在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之非貼合區域91的大小為例如0.5μm以下之保護膜形成用複合片1A,基材11與黏著劑層12的積層性良好,而且可說是具有良好的特性。As the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, it is shown here that such unbonded regions exist between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 (in this specification, they may be referred to as "non-bonded regions"). 91. However, even if the protective film forming composite sheet 1A has such a non-bonding region 91, the size of the non-bonding region 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A is, for example, 0.5 μm or less in the protective film forming composite sheet 1A. , the lamination property of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 is good, and it can be said to have good characteristics.

又,在本說明書,所謂「在保護膜形成用複合片的厚度方向之非貼合區域的大小」意味著「在保護膜形成用複合片之相鄰2層的前述薄片的厚度方向之層間距離」,且有簡稱為「層間距離」之情形。例如上述所謂「在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之非貼合區域91的大小」,意味著「在前述薄片1A的厚度方向之基材11與黏著劑層12之間的層間距離」。 1處的非貼合區域之大小(層間距離)為變動時,採用其最大值作為非貼合區域的大小(層間距離)。In addition, in this specification, "the size of the non-bonding area in the thickness direction of the composite sheet for protective film formation" means "the interlayer distance between the two adjacent sheets of the composite sheet for protective film formation in the thickness direction ", and there is a situation called "distance between layers" for short. For example, "the size of the non-bonding region 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A" mentioned above means "the interlayer distance between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 in the thickness direction of the sheet 1A." . When the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding area at one point fluctuates, the maximum value is adopted as the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding area.

非貼合區域的大小(層間距離),例如能夠使用與上述的黏著劑層的R值的情況的相同方法而測定。亦即,能夠使用與求取黏著劑層的R值時相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片形成剖面,而且在該剖面求取非貼合區域的大小。或者亦可不製造試驗片,而在保護膜形成用複合片本身形成剖面,且在該剖面求取非貼合區域的大小。The size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding region can be measured, for example, using the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned R value of the adhesive layer. That is, a cross section can be formed on the test piece of the composite sheet for protective film formation using the same method as when calculating the R value of the adhesive layer, and the size of the non-bonding region can be obtained on the cross section. Alternatively, without producing a test piece, a cross section may be formed on the protective film forming composite sheet itself, and the size of the non-bonding region may be determined on the cross section.

非貼合區域91的大小(前述層間距離),例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下的任一者。The size of the non-bonding region 91 (the interlayer distance) may be, for example, any one of 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, 0.2 μm or less, and 0.1 μm or less.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,亦有完全不存在非貼合區域91之情形。在本說明書,完全不存在非貼合區域91時,有將非貼合區域91的大小(層間距離)記載為0μm之情形。In 1A of composite sheets for protective film formation, the non-bonding area|region 91 may not exist at all. In this specification, when there is no non-bonding region 91 at all, the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding region 91 may be described as 0 μm.

在此,舉出保護膜形成用複合片1A作為例子,說明基材及黏著劑層,但是保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其它實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片時,基材及黏著劑層為同樣。Here, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1A is taken as an example to describe the base material and the adhesive layer. However, the composite sheet for forming a protective film in other embodiments such as the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1B and the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1C, etc. When, the base material and the adhesive layer are the same.

黏著劑層的R值,只要為1.5以上且小於5.0,就沒有特別限定,以1.7以上為佳,以1.9以上為較佳,例如可為2.3以上、2.7以上、3.1以上、及3.5以上的任一者。藉由前述R值為前述下限值以上,基材與黏著劑的密著性變為更良好。The R value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as it is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0. It is preferably 1.7 or more, more preferably 1.9 or more, for example, it may be any value of 2.3 or more, 2.7 or more, 3.1 or more, and 3.5 or more. one. When the said R value is more than the said lower limit, the adhesiveness of a base material and an adhesive becomes more favorable.

另一方面,黏著劑層的R值例如可為4.5以下,亦可為4.0以下。此種黏著劑層為保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜之透過支撐片的印字視認性變為良好。On the other hand, the R value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 4.5 or less, or may be 4.0 or less. Such an adhesive layer is a protective film or a film for forming a protective film, and the visibility of printed characters through the support sheet becomes good.

黏著劑層的R值能夠藉由將上述的較佳下限值及上限值任意地組合,而能夠適當地調節在所設定的範圍內。例如黏著劑層的R值良好為1.5~4,較佳為1.7~4,更佳為1.9~4,例如可為2.3~4、2.7~4、3.1~4、及3.5~4的任一者。但是該等是黏著劑層的R值的一個例子。The R value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within the set range by arbitrarily combining the above-mentioned preferable lower limit and upper limit. For example, the R value of the adhesive layer is preferably 1.5~4, preferably 1.7~4, more preferably 1.9~4, for example, any one of 2.3~4, 2.7~4, 3.1~4, and 3.5~4 . But this is an example of the R value of the adhesive layer.

黏著劑層的S值,只要不損害本發明的效果,就沒有特別限定,以1.5μm以上且小於9μm為佳。以1.7μm以上為較佳,以1.9μm以上為特佳,例如可為2.3μm以上、2.7μm以上、3.1μm以上、及3.5μm以上的任一者。藉由前述S值為前述下限值以上,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜之積層性變為更良好。The S value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited unless the effects of the present invention are impaired, but is preferably 1.5 μm or more and less than 9 μm. It is preferably 1.7 μm or more, and is particularly preferably 1.9 μm or more. For example, it may be any of 2.3 μm or more, 2.7 μm or more, 3.1 μm or more, and 3.5 μm or more. When the said S value is more than the said lower limit, the laminarity of an adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation becomes more favorable.

另一方面,黏著劑層的S值,例如可為8μm以下。此種黏著劑層能夠更容易地形成。On the other hand, the S value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 8 μm or less. Such an adhesive layer can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的S值,能夠將上述的較佳下限值及上限值任意地組合,而適當地調節在所設定的範圍內。例如黏著劑層的S值良好為1.5~8μm,較佳為1.7~8μm,更佳為1.9~8μm,例如可為2.3~8μm、2.7~8μm、3.1~8μm、及3.5~8μm的任一者。但是該等為黏著劑層的S值的一個例子。The S value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within the set range by arbitrarily combining the above-mentioned preferable lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the S value of the adhesive layer is preferably 1.5-8 μm, preferably 1.7-8 μm, more preferably 1.9-8 μm, for example, any of 2.3-8 μm, 2.7-8 μm, 3.1-8 μm, and 3.5-8 μm . However, these are examples of the S value of the adhesive layer.

黏著劑層的L值,只要不損害本發明的效果,就沒有特別限定,以9μm以下且大於1.5μm為佳。以8.6μm以下為較佳,以8.3μm以下為特佳,例如可為7.7μm以下、7.3μm以下、6.9μm以下、及6.5μm以下的任一者。藉由前述L值為前述上限值以下,保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜之透過支撐片的印字視認性變為更良好。The L value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired, but it is preferably 9 μm or less and greater than 1.5 μm. It is preferably 8.6 μm or less, particularly preferably 8.3 μm or less, for example, it may be any of 7.7 μm or less, 7.3 μm or less, 6.9 μm or less, and 6.5 μm or less. When the said L value is below the said upper limit, the visibility of the printed characters through a support sheet of a protective film or the film for protective film formation becomes more favorable.

另一方面,黏著劑層的L值,例如可為2.5μm以上。此種黏著劑層能夠更容易地形成。On the other hand, the L value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 2.5 μm or more. Such an adhesive layer can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的L值,能夠將上述的較佳下限值及上限值任意地組合,而適當地調節在所設定的範圍內。例如黏著劑層的L值良好為2.5~9μm,較佳為2.5~8.6μm,更佳為2.5~8.3μm,例如可為2.5~7.7μm、2.5~7.3μm、2.5~6.9μm、及2.5~6.5μm的任一者。The L value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within the set range by arbitrarily combining the above-mentioned preferable lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the L value of the adhesive layer is preferably 2.5-9 μm, preferably 2.5-8.6 μm, more preferably 2.5-8.3 μm, such as 2.5-7.7 μm, 2.5-7.3 μm, 2.5-6.9 μm, and 2.5-6.9 μm. Either of 6.5 μm.

黏著劑層的厚度(例如Ta )只要不損害本發明的效果,就沒有特別限定,以滿足上述的S值及L值之條件為佳。 例如黏著劑層的厚度可為1.5~9μm。The thickness of the adhesive layer (for example, T a ) is not particularly limited as long as it does not impair the effect of the present invention, and it is preferable to satisfy the conditions of the above-mentioned S value and L value. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer may be 1.5-9 μm.

又,所謂「黏著劑層的厚度」,意味著黏著劑層全體的厚度,例如由複數層所構成之黏著劑層的厚度,意味著構成黏著劑層之全部的層的合計厚度。從此種觀點,規定上述黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值。Also, the "thickness of the adhesive layer" means the thickness of the entire adhesive layer, for example, the thickness of an adhesive layer composed of a plurality of layers means the total thickness of all the layers constituting the adhesive layer. From such a viewpoint, the minimum value and the maximum value of the thickness of the said adhesive agent layer are prescribed|regulated.

黏著劑層含有黏著劑。 作為前述黏著劑,例如可舉出丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等的黏著性樹脂,以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。The adhesive layer contains an adhesive. Examples of the aforementioned adhesive include adhesives such as acrylic resins, urethane resins, rubber resins, silicone resins, epoxy resins, polyvinyl ethers, polycarbonates, and ester resins. Resin, preferably acrylic resin.

在本發明,所謂「黏著性樹脂」,包含具有黏著性的樹脂、及具有接著性的樹脂的雙方之概念,例如不僅是樹脂本身具有黏著性之物,亦包含藉由併用添加劑等的其它成分而顯示黏著性之樹脂、及藉由熱或水等觸發物的存在而顯示接著性之樹脂等。In the present invention, the so-called "adhesive resin" includes the concept of both adhesive resin and adhesive resin. For example, not only the resin itself has adhesiveness, but also includes other components such as additives used in combination. Resins that exhibit adhesiveness, and resins that exhibit adhesiveness due to the presence of triggers such as heat or water, etc.

黏著劑層以透明為佳。 黏著劑層按照目的亦可經著色。 例如,保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性時,黏著劑層以使能量線透射為佳。The adhesive layer is preferably transparent. The adhesive layer can also be colored according to the purpose. For example, when the film for protective film formation is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the adhesive layer transmits energy ray.

黏著劑層可為使用能量線硬化性黏著劑而形成之物,亦可為使用非能量線硬化性黏著劑而形成之物。使用能量線硬化性黏著劑而形成之黏著劑層,能夠容易地調節硬化前及硬化後的物性。The adhesive layer may be formed using an energy ray-curable adhesive or may be formed using a non-energy ray-curable adhesive. The adhesive layer formed by using the energy ray curable adhesive can easily adjust the physical properties before and after curing.

>>黏著劑組合物>> 黏著劑層能夠使用有黏著劑之黏著劑組合物。例如,藉由將黏著劑組合物塗佈在黏著劑層的形成對象面,且按照需要使其乾燥,而能夠在目標部位形成黏著劑層。黏著劑層之更具體的形成方法,與其它層的形成方法一起在後面詳細地說明。黏著劑組合物中,在常溫不氣化的成分彼此之間的含量比例,通常與黏著劑層的前述成分彼此之間的含量比例為相同。>>Adhesive composition>> For the adhesive layer, an adhesive composition having an adhesive can be used. For example, the adhesive layer can be formed at the target site by applying the adhesive composition on the surface to be formed of the adhesive layer and drying it as necessary. A more specific method of forming the adhesive layer will be described in detail later together with methods of forming other layers. In the adhesive composition, the content ratio of components that do not vaporize at normal temperature is usually the same as the content ratio of the aforementioned components of the adhesive layer.

在本說明書,所謂「常溫」,意味著無特別冷卻或加熱的溫度,亦即平常的溫度,例如可舉出15~25℃的溫度等。In this specification, "normal temperature" means a temperature that is not particularly cooled or heated, that is, a normal temperature, for example, a temperature of 15 to 25° C. is mentioned.

黏著劑組合物的塗佈,使用習知的方法而進行即可,例如可舉出使用空氣刮刀塗佈器、刀片塗佈器、桿塗佈器、凹版塗佈器、輥塗佈器、輥式刮刀塗佈器、簾流塗佈器、模塗佈器、刮刀塗佈器、網篩塗佈器、繞線棒塗佈器、輥舐式塗佈器等的各種塗佈器之方法。The coating of the adhesive composition may be carried out using a known method, for example, an air knife coater, a blade coater, a rod coater, a gravure coater, a roll coater, a roller Various coating methods such as knife coater, curtain coater, die coater, knife coater, screen coater, wire-wound bar coater, lick roll coater, etc.

黏著劑組合物的乾燥條件,沒有特別限定,黏著劑組合物含有後述溶劑時,以使其加熱乾燥為佳。含有溶劑之黏著劑組合物,例如使其在70~130℃且10秒鐘~5分鐘的條件下乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the adhesive composition are not particularly limited, but when the adhesive composition contains the solvent described later, it is preferable to dry it by heating. The adhesive composition containing a solvent is preferably dried at, for example, 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes.

黏著劑層為能量線硬化性時,作為含有能量線硬化性黏著劑之黏著劑組合物,亦即能量線硬化性黏著劑組合物,例如可舉出含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)(以下,有略記為「黏著性樹脂(I-1a)」之情形)、及能量線硬化性化合物之黏著劑組合物(I-1);含有在非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基之能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a) (以下,有略記為「黏著性樹脂(I-2a)」之情形)之黏著劑組合物(I-2);及含有前述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)、及能量線硬化性化合物之黏著劑組合物(I-3)等。When the adhesive layer is energy ray curable, as an adhesive composition containing an energy ray curable adhesive, that is, an energy ray curable adhesive composition, for example, a non-energy ray curable adhesive resin (I -1a) (hereafter, it may be abbreviated as "adhesive resin (I-1a)"), and an adhesive composition (I-1) of an energy ray-curable compound; containing a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin Adhesive composition ( I-2); and an adhesive composition (I-3) containing the aforementioned adhesive resin (I-2a) and an energy ray-curable compound.

>黏著劑組合物(I-1)> 前述黏著劑組合物(I-1)如上述,含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、及能量線硬化性化合物。>Adhesive composition (I-1)> The said adhesive composition (I-1) contains a non-energy ray curable adhesive resin (I-1a) and an energy ray curable compound as mentioned above.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 前述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。 作為前述丙烯酸系樹脂,例如可舉出至少具有源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元之丙烯酸系聚合物。 前述丙烯酸系樹脂所具有之結構單元可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The aforementioned adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably an acrylic resin. As said acrylic resin, the acrylic polymer which has the structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate at least is mentioned, for example. The structural unit which the said acrylic resin has may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

作為前述(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯,例如可舉出構成烷酯之烷基的碳數為1~20之物,前述烷基以直鏈狀或分枝鏈狀為佳。 作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯,更具體地可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酸酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十九酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二十酯等。Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate include those in which the alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. As the alkyl (meth)acrylate, more specifically, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ( n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, second butyl (meth)acrylate, third butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate, Isononyl (meth)acrylate, Decyl (meth)acrylate, Undecyl (meth)acrylate, Lauryl (meth)acrylate (Lauryl (meth)acrylate), Decyl (meth)acrylate Triester, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmyl (meth)acrylate), ( Heptadecyl methacrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), nonadecyl (meth)acrylate, eicosyl (meth)acrylate, and the like.

就提升黏著劑層的黏著力而言,前述丙烯酸系聚合物以具有前述烷基的碳數為4以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元為佳。而且,就進一步提升黏著劑層的黏著力而言,前述烷基的碳數以4~12為佳,以4~8為較佳。又,前述烷基的碳數為4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯以丙烯酸烷酯為佳。In terms of improving the adhesion of the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer preferably has a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms. Moreover, in terms of further enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the carbon number of the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably 4-12, more preferably 4-8. Also, the alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl acrylate.

前述丙烯酸系聚合物除了源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元以外,以進一步具有源自含官能基單體的結構單元為佳。 作為前述含官能基單體,例如可舉出前述官能基藉由與後述交聯劑反應而成為交聯的起點、或前述官能基藉由與後述含不飽和基的化合物中的不飽和基反應而能夠將不飽和基導入至丙烯酸系聚合物的側鏈之物。The acrylic polymer preferably further has a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer in addition to a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. As the aforementioned functional group-containing monomer, for example, the aforementioned functional group becomes a starting point of crosslinking by reacting with a crosslinking agent described later, or the aforementioned functional group reacts with an unsaturated group in an unsaturated group-containing compound described later. On the other hand, it is possible to introduce an unsaturated group into a side chain of an acrylic polymer.

作為含官能基單體中的前述官能基,例如可舉出羥基、羧基、胺基、環氧基等。 亦即,作為含官能基單體,例如可舉出含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。As said functional group in a functional group containing monomer, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amino group, an epoxy group etc. are mentioned, for example. That is, as a functional group containing monomer, a hydroxyl group containing monomer, a carboxyl group containing monomer, an amino group containing monomer, an epoxy group containing monomer etc. are mentioned, for example.

作為前述含羥基的單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸羥基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇類等的非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(不具有(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架之不飽和醇)等。Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer include hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, Hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as hydroxypropyl, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, etc.; vinyl alcohol, Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as allyl alcohols (unsaturated alcohols not having a (meth)acryl skeleton) and the like.

作為前述含羧基的單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等的乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(亦即具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等的乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(亦即具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之二羧酸);前述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酐;甲基丙烯酸2-羧基乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羧基烷酯等。As the aforementioned carboxyl group-containing monomers, for example, ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (that is, monocarboxylic acids having ethylenically unsaturated bonds) such as (meth)acrylic acid and crotonic acid; fumaric acid, Ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as itaconic acid, maleic acid, citraconic acid (that is, dicarboxylic acids having ethylenically unsaturated bonds); anhydrides of the aforementioned ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; methyl Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate, such as 2-carboxyethyl acrylate, etc.

含官能基單體以含羥基單體、含羧基單體為佳,以含羥基的單體為較佳。The functional group-containing monomers are preferably hydroxyl-containing monomers and carboxyl-containing monomers, and more preferably hydroxyl-containing monomers.

構成前述丙烯酸系聚合物之含官能基單體可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The functional group-containing monomer constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be selected arbitrarily.

在前述丙烯酸系聚合物,源自含官能基單體的結構單元之含量,相對於結構單元的總量,以1~35質量%為佳,以2~30質量%為較佳,以3~27質量%為特佳。In the aforementioned acrylic polymer, the content of structural units derived from functional group-containing monomers is preferably 1-35% by mass, more preferably 2-30% by mass, and 3-30% by mass relative to the total amount of structural units. 27% by mass is particularly preferred.

前述丙烯酸系聚合物除了源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元、及源自含官能基單體的結構單元以外,亦可進一步具有源自其它單體的結構單元。 前述其它單體只要能夠與(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯等共聚合之物,就沒有特別限定。 作為前述其它單體,例如可舉出苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、甲酸乙烯酯、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、丙烯醯胺等。The said acrylic polymer may further have the structural unit derived from another monomer other than the structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, and the structural unit derived from a functional group containing monomer. The aforementioned other monomers are not particularly limited as long as they can be copolymerized with alkyl (meth)acrylate or the like. Examples of the other monomers include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, vinyl formate, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, acrylamide and the like.

構成前述丙烯酸系聚合物之前述其它單體可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The said other monomer which comprises the said acrylic polymer may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

前述丙烯酸系聚合物能夠使用作為上述非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)。 另一方面,在前述丙烯酸系聚合物中的官能基,使具有能量線聚合性不飽和基(能量線聚合性基)之含不飽和基的化合物反應而成之物,能夠使用作為上述能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。The aforementioned acrylic polymer can be used as the aforementioned non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). On the other hand, the functional group in the aforementioned acrylic polymer reacts an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group (energy ray polymerizable group), which can be used as the aforementioned energy ray polymer. Hardening adhesive resin (I-2a).

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1),黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量,以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為較佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, more preferably 10 to 95% by mass, and most preferably 15 to 90% by mass .

[能量線硬化性化合物] 作為黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的前述能量線硬化性化合物,可舉出具有能量線聚合性不飽和基且能夠藉由照射能量線而硬化之單體或寡聚物。 能量線硬化性化合物之中,作為單體,例如可舉出三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的多元(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 能量線硬化性化合物之中,作為寡聚物,例如可舉出上述例示的單體聚合而成之寡聚物等。 從分子量較大而不容易使黏著劑層的儲存彈性模數低落的觀點而言,能量線硬化性化合物以胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物為佳。[Energy Beam Curing Compound] Examples of the energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) include monomers or oligomers that have an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and are curable by irradiation with energy ray. Among the energy ray curable compounds, examples of monomers include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, neopentylthritol (meth)acrylate, neopentylthritol tetra(meth)acrylate poly(meth)acrylates such as di-neopentylthritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol (meth)acrylate, etc. Acrylates; Urethane (meth)acrylates; Polyester (meth)acrylates; Polyether (meth)acrylates; Epoxy (meth)acrylates, etc. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, examples of the oligomers include oligomers obtained by polymerizing the monomers exemplified above, and the like. From the viewpoint that the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive layer is not easily lowered because the molecular weight is large, the energy ray-curable compound is based on urethane (meth)acrylate, urethane (meth)acrylate oligomeric Polymers are preferred.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的前述能量線硬化性化合物可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述黏著劑組合物(I-1),前述能量線硬化性化合物的含量以1~95質量%為佳,以5~90質量%為較佳,以10~85質量%為特佳。In the aforementioned adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound is preferably 1-95% by mass, more preferably 5-90% by mass, and particularly preferably 10-85% by mass.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-1a),除了源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元以外,進一步使用具有源自含官能基單體的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物時,黏著劑組合物(I-1)以進一步含有交聯劑為佳。[Crosslinking agent] When the aforementioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is used in addition to a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate as the adhesive resin (I-1a), the adhesive composition (I-1) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

前述交聯劑為例如與前述官能基反應而將黏著性樹脂(I-1a)彼此交聯之物。 作為交聯割,例如可舉出甲苯二異氰酸酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、二甲苯撐基(xylylene)二異氰酸酯、該等二異氰酸酯的加成物等的異氰酸酯系交聯劑(具有異氰酸酯基的交聯劑);乙二醇環氧丙基醚等的環氧系交聯劑(具有環氧丙基的交聯劑);六[1-(2-甲基)-吖環丙烷基]三磷雜三嗪等的吖環丙烷系交聯劑(具有吖環丙烷基的交聯劑);鋁螯合物等的金屬螯合物系交聯劑(具有金屬螯合物構造的交聯劑);三聚異氰酸酯系交聯劑(具有三聚異氰酸骨架的交聯劑)等。 就使黏著劑的凝聚力提升而提升黏著劑層的黏著力而言,及就取得容易等而言,交聯劑以異氰酸酯系交聯劑為佳。The said crosslinking agent reacts with the said functional group, and crosslinks adhesive resin (I-1a) mutually, for example. Examples of the cross-linking agent include isocyanate-based cross-linking agents (those having isocyanate groups) such as toluene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, and adducts of these diisocyanates. cross-linking agent); epoxy-based cross-linking agent such as ethylene glycol glycidyl ether (cross-linking agent with glycidyl group); hexa[1-(2-methyl)-aziridine] Aziridine-based cross-linking agents such as phosphatriazine (cross-linking agents having an aziridine group); metal chelate-based cross-linking agents such as aluminum chelates (cross-linking agents having a metal chelate structure) ); isocyanate-based crosslinking agent (crosslinking agent having isocyanuric acid skeleton) and the like. In terms of increasing the cohesive force of the adhesive to increase the cohesive force of the adhesive layer, and in terms of ease of acquisition, the crosslinking agent is preferably an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的交聯劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be 1 type or 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述黏著劑組合物(I-1),相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量100質量份,交聯劑含量以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.1~20質量份為較佳,以0.3~15質量份為特佳。In the aforementioned adhesive composition (I-1), with respect to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01-50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1-20 parts by mass , preferably 0.3-15 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-1)亦可進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑之黏著劑組合物(I-1),即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,亦充分地進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-1) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-1) containing a photopolymerization initiator fully advances hardening reaction even when irradiated with energy rays of relatively low energy such as ultraviolet rays.

作為前述光聚合起始劑,例如可舉出苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻苯甲酸、苯偶姻苯甲酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等的苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等的苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等的醯基氧化膦化合物;苄基苯基硫醚(sulfide)、四甲基秋蘭姆一硫醚等的硫醚化合物;1-羥基環己基苯基酮等的α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等的偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等的二茂鈦化合物;9-氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
(thioxanthone)等的9-氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化物化合物;聯乙醯等的二酮化合物;二苯基乙二酮(benzil);聯苄(dibenzyl);二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基9-氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯基甲烷;2-羥基-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 又,作為前述光聚合起始劑,例如亦能夠使用1-氯蒽醌等的醌化合物;胺等的光敏化劑等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, benzoin Benzoin compounds such as methyl benzoate and benzoin dimethyl ketal; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propan-1-one, 2,2-dimethoxy Acetophenone compounds such as -1,2-diphenylethan-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide, 2,4,6-tri Acyl phosphine oxide compounds such as toluyl diphenyl phosphine oxide; thioether compounds such as benzyl phenyl sulfide (sulfide), tetramethylthiuram monosulfide; 1-hydroxycyclohexylbenzene α-keto alcohol compounds such as ketones; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; 9-oxothiophene
Figure 02_image001
(thioxanthone) and other 9-oxosulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; peroxide compounds; diketone compounds such as diacetyl; benzil; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyl 9-oxythiol
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone, etc. Moreover, as said photoinitiator, the quinone compound, such as 1-chloroanthraquinone, the photosensitizer, etc. of an amine, etc. can also be used, for example.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有之光聚合起始劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1),光聚合起始劑的含量,相對於前述能量線硬化性化合物的含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為較佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass, relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound. Best, especially preferably 0.05-5 parts by mass.

[其它添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-1)在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可含有不屬於上述的任一種成分之其它添加劑。 作為前述其它添加劑,例如可舉出抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、軟化劑(可塑劑)、填充材(填料)、防鏽劑、著色劑(顏料、染料)、敏化劑、黏著賦予劑、反應遲延劑、交聯促進劑(觸媒)等習知的添加劑。 又,所謂反應遲延劑,例如藉由混入至黏著劑組合物(I-1)中之觸媒的作用,而抑制在保存中的黏著劑組合物(I-1)進行非目標的交聯反應之物。作為反應遲延劑,例如可舉出藉由對觸媒之螯合物形成螯合物錯合物之物,更具體地,可舉出具有在1分子中具有2個以上的羰基(-C(=O)-)之物。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-1) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the aforementioned other additives include antistatic agents, antioxidants, softeners (plasticizers), fillers (fillers), rust inhibitors, colorants (pigments, dyes), sensitizers, adhesion imparting agents, reactive Retardant, cross-linking accelerator (catalyst) and other known additives. In addition, the so-called reaction delay agent, for example, suppresses unintended cross-linking reactions of the adhesive composition (I-1) during storage by the action of a catalyst mixed into the adhesive composition (I-1). things. As a reaction delay agent, for example, a compound that forms a chelate complex with a chelate to a catalyst, and more specifically, a compound having two or more carbonyl groups (-C( =O)-).

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的其它添加劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The other additive contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1),其它添加劑的含量沒有特別限定,按照其種類而適當地選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-1)亦可含有溶劑。黏著劑組合物(I-1)藉由含有溶劑,對塗佈對象面之塗佈適合性提升。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-1) may also contain a solvent. When the adhesive composition (I-1) contains a solvent, the coating suitability to the surface to be coated improves.

前述溶劑以有機溶劑為佳,作為前述有機溶劑,例如可舉出甲基乙基酮、丙酮等的酮;乙酸乙酯等的酯(亦即羧酸酯);四氫呋喃、二㗁烷等的醚;環己烷、正己烷等的脂肪族烴;甲苯、二甲苯等的芳香族烴;1-丙醇、2-丙醇等的醇類等。The aforementioned solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and as the aforementioned organic solvent, for example, ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and acetone; esters such as ethyl acetate (that is, carboxylate); ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; ; Aliphatic hydrocarbons such as cyclohexane and n-hexane; Aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; Alcohols such as 1-propanol and 2-propanol, etc.

作為前述溶劑,例如亦可將在黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的製造時所使用之物,不從黏著性樹脂(I-1a)除去、而直接使用在黏著劑組合物(I-1),亦可在黏著劑組合物(I-1)的製造時,另外添加與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的製造時所使用之物相同或不同種類的溶劑。As the aforementioned solvent, for example, what is used in the production of the adhesive resin (I-1a) may be used directly in the adhesive composition (I-1) without removing it from the adhesive resin (I-1a). , when producing the adhesive composition (I-1), you may additionally add the same or different solvent to that used for producing the adhesive resin (I-1a).

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的溶劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be 1 type or 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1),溶劑的含量沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-2)> 前述黏著劑組合物(I-2)如上述,含有將不飽和基導入至非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈而成之能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。>Adhesive composition (I-2)> The aforementioned adhesive composition (I-2) contains the energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) obtained by introducing unsaturated groups into the side chains of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) as described above. ).

[黏著性樹脂(I-2a)] 前述黏著性樹脂(I-2a),例如能夠藉由使具有能量線聚合性不飽和基之含不飽和基的化合物對黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基進行反應而得到。[Adhesive resin (I-2a)] The aforementioned adhesive resin (I-2a) can be obtained, for example, by reacting an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group with a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a).

前述含不飽和基的化合物,除了前述能量線聚合性不飽和基以外,具有進一步能夠藉由與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基反應,而與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)鍵結之基之化合物。 作為前述能量線聚合性不飽和基,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基(亦稱為ethenyl基)、烯丙基(亦稱為2-丙烯基)等,以(甲基)丙烯醯基為佳。 作為能夠與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基鍵結之基,例如可舉出能夠與羥基或胺基鍵結之異氰酸酯基及環氧丙基,以及能夠與羧基或環氧基鍵結之羥基及胺基等。The aforementioned unsaturated group-containing compound has, in addition to the aforementioned energy ray-polymerizable unsaturated group, a bond capable of bonding with the adhesive resin (I-1a) by reacting with a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a). The compound of the base of the knot. Examples of the aforementioned energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group include (meth)acryl, vinyl (also called ethenyl), allyl (also called 2-propenyl), and the like. ) acryl group is preferred. Examples of groups capable of bonding to functional groups in the adhesive resin (I-1a) include isocyanate groups and glycidyl groups capable of bonding to hydroxyl or amine groups, and groups capable of bonding to carboxyl or epoxy groups. The hydroxyl group and amino group of the junction.

作為前述含不飽和基的化合物,例如可舉出異氰酸(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、異氰酸(甲基)丙烯醯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing compound include (meth)acryloxyethyl isocyanate, (meth)acryl isocyanate, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, and the like.

黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-2a),可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The adhesive resin (I-2a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-2),相對於黏著劑組合物(I-2)的總質量,黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為較佳,以10~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-2), relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, and 10 to 95% by mass. % is more preferable, and 10-90% by mass is particularly preferable.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-2a),例如與在黏著性樹脂(I-1a)之物同樣地,使用具有源自含官能基單體的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物時,黏著劑組合物(I-2)亦可進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] As the adhesive resin (I-2a), for example, as in the adhesive resin (I-1a), when the aforementioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is used, the adhesive composition (I-2) may further contain a crosslinking agent.

作為在黏著劑組合物(I-2)之前述交聯劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之交聯劑相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的交聯劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。Examples of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same ones as the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be 1 type or 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述黏著劑組合物(I-2),相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.1~20質量份為較佳,以0.3~15質量份為特佳。In the aforementioned adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). Best, especially preferably 0.3-15 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-2)亦可進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑之黏著劑組合物(I-2)即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,亦充分地進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-2) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. Even if the adhesive composition (I-2) containing a photoinitiator is irradiated with low-energy energy rays, such as an ultraviolet-ray, hardening reaction fully progresses.

作為在黏著劑組合物(I-2)之前述光聚合起始劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之光聚合起始劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的光聚合起始劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same ones as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photoinitiator contained in an adhesive composition (I-2) may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-2),相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,光聚合起始劑的含量以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為較佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-2), relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, and preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass. Preferably, 0.05 to 5 parts by mass is particularly preferred.

[其它添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-2)在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可含有不歸屬於上述的任一種成分之其它添加劑。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-2)之前述其它添加劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之其它添加劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的其它添加劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain other additives not belonging to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same ones as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-2),其它添加劑的含量沒有特別限定,按照其種類而適當地選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-2)基於與黏著劑組合物(I-1)的情況同樣的目的,亦可含有溶劑。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-2)之前述溶劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之溶劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的溶劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。 在黏著劑組合物(I-2),溶劑的含量沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the aforementioned solvent in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same ones as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be 1 type or 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-3)> 前述黏著劑組合物(I-3)如上述,含有前述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)、及能量線硬化性化合物。>Adhesive composition (I-3)> The said adhesive composition (I-3) contains the said adhesive resin (I-2a) and an energy ray curable compound as mentioned above.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3),相對於黏著劑組合物(I-3)的總質量,黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為較佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-3), relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, and 10 to 95% by mass. % is better, and 15-90% by mass is particularly preferred.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 作為黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的前述能量線硬化性化合物,可舉出具有能量線聚合性不飽和基,且能夠藉由照射能量線而硬化的單體及寡聚物;而且可舉出與黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的能量線硬化性化合物的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的前述能量線硬化性化合物可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Energy Beam Curing Compound] Examples of the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) include monomers and oligomers that have an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and can be cured by irradiation with energy ray; and Examples thereof include the same ones as the energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1). The said energy ray curable compound contained in an adhesive composition (I-3) may be 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述黏著劑組合物(I-3),相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,前述能量線硬化性化合物的含量以0.01~300質量份為佳,以0.03~200質量份為較佳,以0.05~100質量份為特佳。In the aforementioned adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound is preferably 0.01 to 300 parts by mass, preferably 0.03 to 200 parts by mass, relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). 0.05-100 parts by mass is preferred, particularly preferably 0.05-100 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-3)亦可進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑之黏著劑組合物(I-3)即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線亦充分地進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-3) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-3) containing a photoinitiator fully progressed hardening reaction even when it irradiated the energy ray of low energy, such as an ultraviolet-ray.

作為在黏著劑組合物(I-3)之前述光聚合起始劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之光聚合起始劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的光聚合起始劑可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) include the same ones as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3),相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)及前述能量線硬化性化合物的總含量100質量份,光聚合起始劑的含量以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為較佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound. , preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.05 to 5 parts by mass.

[其它添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-3)在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可含有不歸屬於上述任一種成分之其它添加劑。 作為前述其它添加劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之其它添加劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的其它添加劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain other additives not belonging to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the aforementioned other additives include the same ones as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3),其它添加劑的含量沒有特別限定,按照其種類而適當地選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-3)基於與黏著劑組合物(I-1)的情況同樣的目的,亦可含有溶劑。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-3)之前述溶劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之溶劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的溶劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。 在黏著劑組合物(I-3),溶劑的含量沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the aforementioned solvent in the adhesive composition (I-3) include the same ones as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物> 至此為止,雖然主要是說明了黏著劑組合物(I-1)、黏著劑組合物(I-2)及黏著劑組合物(I-3),作為該等的含有成分而說明之物,能夠同樣地使用於該等3種黏著劑組合物以外的全體黏著劑組合物(在本說明書,亦稱為「黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物」)。> Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)> So far, although the adhesive composition (I-1), adhesive composition (I-2) and adhesive composition (I-3) have been mainly described, what has been described as these components can be Similarly used for all adhesive compositions other than these three types of adhesive compositions (in this specification, also referred to as "adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)" ).

作為黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,除了能量線硬化性黏著劑組合物以外,亦可舉出非能量線硬化性黏著劑組合物。 作為非能量線硬化性黏著劑組合物,例如可舉出丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯基醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)之黏著劑組合物(I-4),以含有丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。As the adhesive composition other than the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3), in addition to the energy ray-curable adhesive composition, a non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition is also mentioned. Examples of non-energy ray curable adhesive compositions include acrylic resins, urethane resins, rubber resins, silicone resins, epoxy resins, polyvinyl ethers, polycarbonates, The adhesive composition (I-4) containing a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a), such as an ester resin, preferably contains an acrylic resin.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,以含有1種或2種以上的交聯劑為佳,其含量能夠設定為與上述黏著劑組合物(I-1)的情況時相同。Adhesive compositions other than the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) preferably contain one or more crosslinking agents, and the content can be set to be the same as the above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-3). The case of -1) is the same.

>黏著劑組合物(I-4)> 作為較佳黏著劑組合物(I-4)之物,例如可舉出含有前述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、及交聯劑之物。>Adhesive composition (I-4)> As a preferable adhesive composition (I-4), what contains the said adhesive resin (I-1a) and a crosslinking agent is mentioned, for example.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-4)之黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之黏著性樹脂(I-1a)相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] Examples of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same as the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-1). The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4),相對於黏著劑組合物(I-4)的總質量,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為較佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-4), relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, and 10 to 95% by mass. % is better, and 15-90% by mass is particularly preferred.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4),相對於溶劑以外的全部成分的總含量,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量的比例(亦即,黏著劑層的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量)以30~90質量%為佳,以40~85質量%為較佳,以50~80質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the ratio of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive layer content) is preferably 30-90% by mass, more preferably 40-85% by mass, and particularly preferably 50-80% by mass.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-1a),除了源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元以外,進一步使用具有源自含官能基單體的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物時,黏著劑組合物(I-4)以進一步含有交聯劑為佳。[Crosslinking agent] When the aforementioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is used in addition to a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate as the adhesive resin (I-1a), the adhesive composition (I-4) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

作為在黏著劑組合物(I-4)之交聯劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之交聯劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)所含有的交聯劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。Examples of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same ones as the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述黏著劑組合物(I-4),交聯劑含量相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.3~50質量份為較佳,以1~50質量份為更佳,例如可為10~50質量份、15~50質量份、及20~50質量份等的任一者。In the aforementioned adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01-50 parts by mass, preferably 0.3-50 parts by mass, relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). , more preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass, for example, any of 10 to 50 parts by mass, 15 to 50 parts by mass, and 20 to 50 parts by mass.

[其它添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-4)在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可含有不歸屬於上述任一種成分的其它添加劑。 作為前述其它添加劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之其它添加劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)所含有的其它添加劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the aforementioned other additives include the same ones as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only 1 type, or may be 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4),其它添加劑的含量沒有特別限定,按照其種類而適當地選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-4)基於與黏著劑組合物(I-1)的情況同樣的目的亦可含有溶劑。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-4)之前述溶劑,可舉出與在黏著劑組合物(I-1)之溶劑的相同物。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)所含有的溶劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。 在黏著劑組合物(I-4),溶劑的含量沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the aforementioned solvent in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same ones as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

在前述保護膜形成用複合片,黏著劑層以非能量線硬化性為佳。這是因為黏著劑層為能量線硬化性時,藉由照射能量線而使保護膜形成用薄膜硬化時,無法抑制黏著劑層亦同時硬化。黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜同時硬化時,則硬化後的保護膜形成用薄膜(亦即,保護膜)與黏著劑層在該等的界面有無法剝離的程度的貼附之情形。此時,在背面具備硬化後的保護膜形成用薄膜、亦即保護膜之半導體晶片(附保護膜的半導體晶片),難以使具備硬化後的黏著劑層之支撐片剝離,且無法正常地將附保護膜的半導體晶片拾取。在前述支撐片,藉由將黏著劑層設為非能量線硬化性之物,能夠確實地避免此種不良且能夠將附保護膜的半導體晶片更容易地拾取。In the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer is preferably non-energy ray curable. This is because when the adhesive layer is energy ray curable and the thin film for forming a protective film is cured by irradiating energy rays, the adhesive layer cannot be suppressed from being cured at the same time. When the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film are cured at the same time, the film for forming a protective film (that is, the protective film) after curing and the adhesive layer may adhere to such an extent that they cannot be peeled off at the interface. At this time, it is difficult to peel off the support sheet provided with the hardened adhesive layer for the semiconductor wafer (semiconductor wafer with protective film) provided with the film for forming the protective film after hardening, that is, the protective film on the back surface, and it is impossible to remove the hardened adhesive layer normally. Pickup of semiconductor wafers with protective film. In the support sheet, by making the adhesive layer non-energy ray curable, such a defect can be reliably avoided and the semiconductor wafer with the protective film can be picked up more easily.

在此,已說明黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性時的效果,但是即便支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜直接接觸之層為黏著劑層以外之層,該層為非能量線硬化性時,亦可達成同樣的效果。Here, the effect when the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable has been described, but even if the layer in direct contact between the support sheet and the film for forming a protective film is a layer other than the adhesive layer and the layer is non-energy ray curable, The same effect can also be achieved.

>>黏著劑組合物的製造方法>> 黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)、及黏著劑組合物(I-4)等的黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,能夠藉由將前述黏著劑、按照需要之前述黏著劑以外的成分等用以構成黏著劑組合物之各成分進行調配而得到。 在各成分的調配時之添加順序沒有特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶劑時,亦可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一種調配成分混合,藉由將該調配成分預先稀釋而使用,亦可將溶劑以外的任一種調配成分不預先稀釋,而將溶劑與該等調配成分混合而使用。 調配時將各成分混合之方法沒有特別限定,從使攪拌子或攪拌葉等旋轉而混合之方法;使用混合機而混合之方法;及施加超音波而混合之方法等習知的方法適當地選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度及時間,只要各調配成分不劣化就沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可,溫度以15~30℃為佳>>Manufacturing method of adhesive composition>> Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3), such as adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3), and adhesive composition (I-4), It can be obtained by preparing the above-mentioned adhesive, components other than the above-mentioned adhesive, and the like as needed to constitute the adhesive composition. The addition order at the time of compounding of each component is not specifically limited, You may add 2 or more types of components simultaneously. When using a solvent, it is also possible to mix the solvent with any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent, and to use the prepared ingredients by diluting the prepared ingredients in advance, or to mix the solvent with the prepared ingredients without pre-diluting any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent. The ingredients are mixed and used. There is no particular limitation on the method of mixing the ingredients during preparation, and it can be appropriately selected from known methods such as a method of mixing by rotating a stirring bar or a stirring blade, a method of mixing by using a mixer, and a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. That's it. The temperature and time for the addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as the components are not deteriorated, and can be adjusted appropriately. The temperature is preferably 15~30°C

◎保護膜形成用薄膜 前述保護膜形成用薄膜藉由硬化、或在不使其硬化的狀態下,直接成為保護膜。該保護膜是用以保護半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的背面(與電極形成面為相反側的面)之物。保護膜形成用薄膜為軟質且能夠容易地貼附在貼附對象。◎Films for protective film formation The said thin film for protective film formation becomes a protective film directly by hardening or the state which does not make it harden. This protective film is for protecting the semiconductor wafer or the back surface (the surface opposite to the electrode formation surface) of the semiconductor wafer. The film for protective film formation is soft and can be easily attached to an attachment object.

前述保護膜形成用薄膜可為硬化性亦可為非硬化性。 硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜可為熱硬化性及能量線硬化性的任一者,亦可具有熱硬化性及能量線硬化性雙方的特性。 保護膜形成用薄膜能夠使用含有其構成材料之保護膜形成用組合物而形成。The aforementioned thin film for protective film formation may be curable or non-curable. The thin film for forming a curable protective film may be either thermosetting or energy ray curable, or may have both thermosetting and energy ray curable properties. The thin film for protective film formation can be formed using the composition for protective film formation containing the constituent material.

在本說明書,所謂「非硬化性」,意味著藉由加熱、照射能量線等任何的手段亦不硬化的性質。 在本發明,只要保護膜形成用薄膜硬化之後,亦能夠維持支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物(換言之、支撐片及保護膜)之積層結構,就將該積層體稱為「保護膜形成用複合片」。In this specification, "non-curable" means the property of not being cured by any means such as heating or irradiation of energy rays. In the present invention, as long as the laminate structure of the hardened product of the support sheet and the protective film forming film (in other words, the support sheet and the protective film) can be maintained even after the film for forming the protective film is cured, the laminate is called "protective film". forming a composite sheet".

保護膜形成用薄膜不管其種類如何,可為由1層(單層)所構成之物,亦可為由2層以上的複數層所構成之物。保護膜形成用薄膜由複數層所構成時,該等複數層可互相相同亦可不同。Regardless of the type, the film for forming a protective film may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When the thin film for protective film formation consists of plural layers, these plural layers may be mutually same or different.

在此,再次邊參照第4圖邊更詳細地說明黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜。 如前面的說明,基材11的第1面11a為凹凸面。但是在黏著劑層12,藉由其R值為小於5.0,能夠抑制該凹凸面的影響,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度容易變小。因此,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13的積層性容易變為良好。又,藉由前述S值為1.5μm以上,能夠抑制該凹凸面的影響,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度變小。例如在黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13之間,即便存在該等未被貼合的區域(非貼合區域)92,其數目在保護膜形成用複合片1A中的保護膜形成用薄膜13的形成區域全域範圍變為非常少,為3處以下等。前述非貼合區域92例如能夠藉由從基材11側觀察保護膜形成用複合片1A而容易地確認。Here, the adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation are demonstrated in more detail, referring FIG. 4 again. As described above, the first surface 11a of the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. However, since the R value of the adhesive layer 12 is less than 5.0, the influence of the uneven surface can be suppressed, and the degree of unevenness on the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 tends to be small. Therefore, the laminarity of the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for protective film formation becomes favorable easily. Moreover, when the said S value is 1.5 micrometers or more, the influence of this uneven surface can be suppressed, and the unevenness|corrugation degree on the 1st surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 becomes small. For example, between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film, even if there are such unbonded regions (non-bonded regions) 92, the number of them exceeds that of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A in the protective film forming composite sheet 1A. The entire area where the thin film 13 is formed is very small, such as three places or less. The said non-bonding area|region 92 can be confirmed easily by observing 1 A of composite sheets for protective film formation from the base material 11 side, for example.

而且,保護膜形成用複合片1A即便具有此種非貼合區域92,在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)為例如0.5μm以下之保護膜形成用複合片1A,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13的積層性較良好。在此所謂「非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)」,意味著在「保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13之間的層間距離」。Furthermore, even if the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film has such a non-bonding region 92, the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding region 92 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film is, for example, 0.5 μm or less. In the forming composite sheet 1A, the laminarity between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film is relatively good. Here, "the size of the non-bonding region 92 (interlayer distance)" means "the interlayer distance between the adhesive layer 12 and the protective film forming film 13 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A".

非貼合區域92的大小(前述層間距離)與上述非貼合區域91的前述層間距離(大小)同樣地,以0.5μm以下為佳,例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下的任一者。The size (interlayer distance) of the non-adhesive region 92 is the same as the aforementioned interlayer distance (size) of the non-adhered region 91, preferably 0.5 μm or less, for example, 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, or 0.2 μm or less. and 0.1 μm or less.

非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離),例如除了對象之2層組合不同之點以外,能夠使用與上述非貼合區域91的大小(層間距離)的情況相同方法而求取。The size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding region 92 can be obtained using the same method as the size (distance between layers) of the above-mentioned non-bonding region 91 except for the point that the combination of the two layers of the object is different.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A,亦有非貼合區域92為完全不存在之情形。在本說明書,非貼合區域92為完全不存在時,有將非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)記載為0μm之情形。In 1A of composite sheets for protective film formation, the non-bonding area|region 92 may not exist at all. In this specification, when the non-bonding region 92 does not exist at all, the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonding region 92 may be described as 0 μm.

另一方面,如上述,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度容易變小。因此,保護膜形成用薄膜13的厚度Tp 不為定值,雖然依照保護膜形成用薄膜13(黏著劑層12)的部位而變動,但是其變動幅度為非常小。On the other hand, as described above, the degree of unevenness on the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 tends to be small. Therefore, the thickness T p of the film 13 for forming a protective film is not constant, and varies depending on the location of the film 13 for forming a protective film (adhesive layer 12 ), but the range of variation is very small.

而且,如上述,因為在黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度容易變小,所以保護膜形成用薄膜13之黏著劑層12側的面(第2面)13b為平滑、或凹凸度容易變小。因而,不容易損害保護膜形成用薄膜13的外觀。 而且在由保護膜形成用薄膜13所形成的保護膜,其黏著劑層12側的面(第2面)亦為平滑、或凹凸度為變小且容易成為不損害保護膜的外觀之狀態。 如此地,在保護膜形成用複合片1A,保護膜形成用薄膜13及保護膜任一者均能夠具有優異的設計性。Furthermore, as described above, since the unevenness on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 tends to be small, the surface (second surface) 13b on the side of the adhesive layer 12 of the film 13 for forming a protective film is smooth or uneven. Easy to get smaller. Therefore, the appearance of the film 13 for protective film formation is less likely to be damaged. In addition, the surface (second surface) on the side of the adhesive layer 12 of the protective film formed from the protective film-forming film 13 is also smooth, or the unevenness is reduced, and the appearance of the protective film is easily not damaged. Thus, in 1 A of composite sheets for protective film formation, both the thin film 13 for protective film formation, and a protective film can have excellent design property.

在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b,凸部的最高部位與凹部的最深部位之間的最大高低差,以2μm以下為佳,例如可為1.5μm以下及1μm以下的任一者。此種保護膜形成用薄膜13及保護膜具有特別優異的設計性。On the second surface 13b of the protective film-forming film 13, the maximum height difference between the highest portion of the convex portion and the deepest portion of the concave portion is preferably 2 μm or less, for example, either 1.5 μm or less or 1 μm or less. Such a protective film forming thin film 13 and a protective film have particularly excellent design properties.

在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b之前述最大高低差,例如能夠藉由使用前面已說明的方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片或保護膜形成用複合片本身形成剖面,且使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM)觀察該剖面而求取。The above-mentioned maximum height difference on the second surface 13b of the film 13 for forming a protective film can be, for example, formed a section on a test piece of a composite sheet for forming a protective film or the composite sheet itself for forming a protective film by using the method described above, And it obtained|required by observing this cross section using a scanning electron microscope (SEM).

在此,雖然舉出保護膜形成用複合片1A作為例子,說明黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜,但是保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等的其它實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況時,黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜為相同。Here, the protective film-forming composite sheet 1A is taken as an example to describe the adhesive layer and the protective film-forming film. In the case of the composite sheet for film formation, the adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation are the same.

在本發明的保護膜形成用複合片,保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度(例如Tp )以1~100μm為佳,以3~75μm為較佳,以5~50μm為特佳。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度為前述下限值以上,能夠形成保護能力較高的保護膜。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度為前述上限值以下,能夠抑制過剩的厚度。In the protective film-forming composite sheet of the present invention, the thickness of the protective film-forming film (for example, T p ) is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 3 to 75 μm, and particularly preferably 5 to 50 μm. When the thickness of the film for protective film formation is more than the said lower limit, the protective film with high protective ability can be formed. Excessive thickness can be suppressed by the thickness of the film for protective film formation being below the said upper limit.

保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度依照保護膜形成用薄膜的部位而變動的情況時,保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度的最小值可為前述下限值以上,保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度的最大值可為前述上限值以下。When the thickness of the film for forming a protective film varies depending on the position of the film for forming a protective film, the minimum value of the thickness of the film for forming a protective film may be more than the aforementioned lower limit, and the maximum value of the thickness of the film for forming a protective film may be at least below the aforementioned upper limit.

又,所謂「保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度」,意味著保護膜形成用薄膜全體的厚度,例如由複數層所構成之保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度,意味著構成保護膜形成用薄膜之全部的層之合計厚度。In addition, the "thickness of the film for forming a protective film" means the thickness of the film for forming a protective film as a whole. The total thickness of the layers.

保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度,例如能夠藉由使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM),藉由觀察保護膜形成用薄膜的側面或剖面而測定。 保護膜形成用薄膜的剖面,例如能夠使用與在上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片之剖面時同樣的方法而形成。The thickness of the film for forming a protective film can be measured, for example, by observing the side or cross section of the film for forming a protective film using a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross section of the film for forming a protective film can be formed, for example, by the same method as in the cross section of the test piece of the support sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film described above.

例如使用前面已說明的方法,從保護膜形成用複合片的複數處(例如5處)切取試驗片,在該試驗片求取保護膜形成用薄膜厚度的最小值及最大值,從該等值進而求取該等最小值的平均值及最大值的平均值時,前述最小值的平均值可為上述保護膜形成用薄膜厚度的下限值以上,前述最大值的平均值可為上述保護膜形成用薄膜厚度的上限值以下。For example, using the method described above, a test piece is cut from plural places (for example, 5 places) of the composite sheet for forming a protective film, and the minimum and maximum values of the film thickness for forming a protective film are obtained from the test piece. Furthermore, when the average value of these minimum values and the average value of the maximum value are calculated|required, the average value of the said minimum value may be more than the lower limit value of the film thickness for the said protective film formation, and the average value of the said maximum value may be the above-mentioned protective film It is not more than the upper limit value of the film thickness for formation.

保護膜形成用薄膜能夠使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組合物而形成。例如能夠藉由將保護膜形成用組合物塗佈在保護膜形成用薄膜的形成對象面,按照需要使其乾燥而在目標部位形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用組合物中之在常溫不氣化的成分彼此的含量比例,通常與保護膜形成用薄膜的前述成分彼此之間的含量比例相同。The thin film for protective film formation can be formed using the composition for protective film formation containing the constituent material. For example, the protective film-forming film can be formed on the target site by applying the protective film-forming composition to the formation target surface of the protective film-forming film and drying it as necessary. The content ratio of the components that do not vaporize at normal temperature in the protective film forming composition is usually the same as the content ratio of the aforementioned components in the protective film forming film.

保護形成用組合物的塗佈使用習知的方法而進行即可,例如可舉出使用空氣刮刀塗佈器、刀片塗佈器、桿塗佈器、凹版塗佈器、輥塗佈器、輥式刮刀塗佈器、簾流塗佈器、模塗佈器、刮刀塗佈器、網篩塗佈器、繞線棒塗佈器、輥舐式塗佈器等的各種塗佈器之方法。The coating of the composition for forming a shield may be performed by a known method, for example, an air knife coater, a blade coater, a bar coater, a gravure coater, a roll coater, a roller Various coating methods such as knife coater, curtain coater, die coater, knife coater, screen coater, wire-wound bar coater, lick roll coater, etc.

保護膜形成用組合物的乾燥條件沒有特別限定,保護膜形成用組合物含有後述的溶劑時,以使其加熱乾燥為佳。而且,含有溶劑之保護膜形成用組合物,例如以在70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件下使其乾燥為佳。但是保護膜形成用組合物為熱硬化性時,所形成的保護膜形成用薄膜以不使其熱硬化的方式、使保護膜形成用組合物乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the composition for forming a protective film are not particularly limited, but when the composition for forming a protective film contains a solvent described later, it is preferable to dry it by heating. Furthermore, it is preferable to dry the protective film-forming composition containing a solvent, for example, at 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes. However, when the composition for forming a protective film is thermosetting, it is preferable to dry the composition for forming a protective film so that the formed thin film for forming a protective film is not cured by thermosetting.

以下,針對保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜形成用組合物,每一種類都詳細地說明。Hereinafter, each type will be demonstrated in detail about the thin film for protective film formation, and the composition for protective film formation.

○熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 作為較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,例如可舉出含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)之物。 聚合物成分(A)能夠視為聚合性化合物進行聚合反應而形成之成分。 熱硬化性成分(B)將熱作為反應觸發物、進行硬化(聚合)反應而得到之成分。又,在本發明聚合反應亦包含聚縮合反應。○Films for thermosetting protective film formation As a preferable film for thermosetting protective film formation, the thing containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B) is mentioned, for example. The polymer component (A) can be regarded as a component formed by polymerizing a polymerizable compound. The thermosetting component (B) is a component obtained by performing a curing (polymerization) reaction using heat as a reaction trigger. In addition, the polymerization reaction in the present invention also includes polycondensation reaction.

將熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附在半導體晶圓的背面之後,使其熱硬化時之硬化條件,只要硬化物成為充分地發揮其功能的程度之硬化度時、就沒有特別限定,按照熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類而適當地選擇即可。 例如,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的熱硬化時之加熱溫度以100~200℃為佳,以110~180℃為較佳,以120~170℃為特佳。而且,前述硬化時的加熱時間以0.5~5小時為佳,以0.5~3小時為較佳,以1~2小時為特佳。After sticking the film for forming a thermosetting protective film on the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and then thermosetting it, the curing conditions are not particularly limited as long as the cured product has a degree of curing sufficient to exert its function. What is necessary is just to select suitably for the kind of thin film for thermosetting protective film formation. For example, the heating temperature at the time of thermal curing of the thermosetting protective film forming film is preferably 100 to 200°C, more preferably 110 to 180°C, and particularly preferably 120 to 170°C. Furthermore, the heating time during the aforementioned hardening is preferably 0.5 to 5 hours, more preferably 0.5 to 3 hours, and particularly preferably 1 to 2 hours.

>熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)> 作為較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,例如可舉出含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)之熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)(在本說明書,有只有略記為「組合物(III-1)」之情形)等。>Thermosetting protective film forming composition (III-1)> As a preferable composition for forming a thermosetting protective film, for example, a composition (III-1) for forming a thermosetting protective film containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B) (in this Instructions, there may be only abbreviated as "composition (III-1)", etc.).

[聚合物成分(A)] 聚合物成分(A)是用以對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等之成分。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的聚合物成分(A)可只有1種亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Polymer component (A)] The polymer component (A) is a component for imparting film formability, flexibility, and the like to the film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The polymer component (A) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind or two or more kinds. choose.

作為聚合物成分(A),例如可舉出丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、苯氧基樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺等,以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。Examples of the polymer component (A) include acrylic resins, polyesters, urethane resins, urethane acrylate resins, silicone resins, rubber resins, phenoxy resins, thermosetting Non-volatile polyimide, etc., preferably acrylic resin.

作為在聚合物成分(A)之前述丙烯酸系樹脂,可舉出習知的丙烯酸聚合物。 丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量(Mw)以10000~2000000為佳,以100000~1500000為較佳。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量為前述下限值以上,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀安定性(保管時的經時安定性)提升。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量為前述上限值以下,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜容易追隨被黏著物的凹凸面,且能夠進一步抑制被黏著物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之間產生空隙等。As the above-mentioned acrylic resin in the polymer component (A), known acrylic polymers can be mentioned. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic resin is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably 100,000 to 1,500,000. When the weight average molecular weight of an acrylic resin is more than the said lower limit, the shape stability (time-dependent stability at the time of storage) of the film for thermosetting protective film formation improves. In addition, when the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is below the above-mentioned upper limit, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can easily follow the uneven surface of the adherend, and the adhesion between the adherend and the forming film for thermosetting protective film can be further suppressed. Voids and the like are generated between the films.

在本說明書,所謂重量平均分子量,只要未特別限定,意味著使用凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)法而測定之聚苯乙烯換算值。In the present specification, the term "weight average molecular weight" means a polystyrene-equivalent value measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.

丙烯酸系樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)以-60~70℃為佳,以-30~50℃為較佳。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg為前述下限值以上,例如能夠抑制保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物(亦即保護膜)與支撐片之接著力,且適當地提升支撐片的剝離性。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg為前述上限值以下,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜與被黏著物的接著力提升。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of acrylic resin is preferably -60~70°C, preferably -30~50°C. When Tg of an acrylic resin is more than the said lower limit, the peelability of a support sheet can be improved suitably, for example while suppressing the adhesive force of the hardened|cured material (that is, a protective film) of the film for protective film formation, and a support sheet. Moreover, when Tg of an acrylic resin is below the said upper limit, the adhesive force of the film for thermosetting protective film formation, a protective film, and an adherend improves.

又,不限定於丙烯酸系樹脂,本說明書中的樹脂之Tg,例如能夠藉由使用差示掃描熱量計(DSC),將升溫速度或降溫速度設為10℃/min,在-70℃起至150℃之間使測定對象物的溫度變化,確認轉折點而求取。 Moreover, it is not limited to acrylic resins, and the Tg of the resins in this specification can be set at -70°C to Change the temperature of the object to be measured between 150°C and obtain it by confirming the inflection point.

作為丙烯酸系樹脂,例如可舉出1種或2種以上的(甲基)丙烯酸酯聚合物;選自(甲基)丙烯酸、伊康酸、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之2種以上的單體之共聚物等。 Examples of acrylic resins include one or more (meth)acrylate polymers; selected from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, and N-hydroxy Copolymers of two or more monomers such as methacrylamide, etc.

作為構成丙烯酸系樹脂之前述(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯十二酸((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酸酯)等的構成烷酯之烷基是碳數為1~18的鏈狀結構之(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯;(甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烷酯;(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯;(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯酯;(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯環烯氧基烷酯;(甲基)丙烯酸醯亞胺;(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等的含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸羥基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯等的含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸N-甲基胺乙酯等含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。在此,所謂「取代胺基」,意味著胺基的1個或2個氫原子經氫原子以外的基取代而成之基。Examples of the (meth)acrylate constituting the acrylic resin include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, and isopropyl (meth)acrylate. ester, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, second-butyl (meth)acrylate, third-butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate base) hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-(meth)acrylate Nonyl, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic dodecanoic acid (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (meth)acrylate ) tridecyl acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmyl (meth)acrylate ), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc., the alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester is one of the chain structures with 1 to 18 carbon atoms. Alkyl (meth)acrylates; cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isocamphoryl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate; (meth)acrylic acid such as benzyl (meth)acrylate Aralkyl acrylate; cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as dicyclopentenyl (meth)acrylate; (meth)acrylcycloalkenyloxy such as dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate Alkyl esters; imide (meth)acrylates; glycidyl (meth)acrylates such as glycidyl (meth)acrylate; Hydroxymethyl(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl(meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxy(meth)acrylate Hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates such as butyl ester, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate; (meth)acrylates containing substituted amino groups such as N-methylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Here, the "substituted amino group" means a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms of an amino group are substituted with a group other than a hydrogen atom.

丙烯酸系樹脂例如除了前述(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外,亦可為選自(甲基)丙烯酸、伊康酸、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之1種或2種以上的單體共聚合而成之物。The acrylic resin may be, for example, one selected from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, and N-methylolacrylamide in addition to the aforementioned (meth)acrylates. A copolymer of one or more monomers.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂之單體可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The monomer which comprises an acrylic resin may be 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

丙烯酸系樹脂亦可具有乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等能夠與其它化合物鍵結的官能基。丙烯酸系樹脂的前述官能基,可透過後述的交聯劑(F)而與其它化合物鍵結,亦可不透過交聯劑(F)而與其它化合物直接鍵結。丙烯酸系樹脂藉由前述官能基而與其它化合物鍵結,使用保護膜形成用複合片而得到的封裝體之可靠性有提升之傾向。The acrylic resin may have functional groups capable of bonding with other compounds, such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups. The aforementioned functional groups of the acrylic resin may be bonded to other compounds through a crosslinking agent (F) described later, or may be directly bonded to other compounds without passing through a crosslinking agent (F). The acrylic resin is bonded to other compounds through the functional group, and the reliability of the package obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film tends to be improved.

在本發明,作為聚合物成分(A),可將丙烯酸系樹脂以外的熱可塑性樹脂(以下有略記為「熱可塑性樹脂」之情形)不與丙烯酸系樹脂併用、單獨使用,亦可與丙烯酸系樹脂併用。藉由使用前述熱可塑性樹脂,保護膜從支撐片之剝離性提升、或熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜容易追隨被黏著物的凹凸面,而且有進一步抑制在被黏著物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之間產生空隙等之情形。In the present invention, as the polymer component (A), thermoplastic resins other than acrylic resins (hereinafter abbreviated as "thermoplastic resins") may be used alone without acrylic resins, or together with acrylic resins. Resin is used together. By using the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, the release property of the protective film from the support sheet is improved, or the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can easily follow the uneven surface of the adherend, and there is further suppression between the adherend and the thermosetting protective film. A case where voids, etc., are generated between thin films for formation.

前述熱可塑性樹脂的重量平均分子量以1000~100000為佳,以3000~80000為較佳。The weight average molecular weight of the aforementioned thermoplastic resin is preferably 1,000-100,000, more preferably 3,000-80,000.

前述熱可塑性樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)以-30~150℃為佳,以-20~120℃為較佳。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the aforementioned thermoplastic resin is preferably -30~150°C, more preferably -20~120°C.

作為前述熱可塑性樹脂,例如可舉出聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等。Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, polystyrene and the like.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的前述熱可塑性樹脂可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The aforementioned thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combinations and ratios thereof can be arbitrarily selected. .

組合物(III-1),相對於溶劑以外的全部成分的總含量,聚合物成分(A)的含量比例(亦即熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的聚合物成分(A)的含量)不管聚合物成分(A)的種類如何,以5~85質量%為佳,以5~75質量%為較佳,例如可為5~65質量%、5~50質量%、及10~35質量%等的任一者。Composition (III-1), regardless of the content ratio of the polymer component (A) (that is, the content of the polymer component (A) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film) to the total content of all components except the solvent The type of polymer component (A) is preferably 5-85% by mass, more preferably 5-75% by mass, for example, 5-65% by mass, 5-50% by mass, and 10-35% by mass etc. either.

聚合物成分(A)有亦符合熱硬化性成分(B)之情況。在本發明,組合物(III-1)含有此種符合聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)的雙方之成分時,組合物(III-1)視為含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)。The polymer component (A) may also correspond to the thermosetting component (B). In the present invention, when the composition (III-1) contains such a component corresponding to both the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B), the composition (III-1) is regarded as containing the polymer component (A ) and thermosetting component (B).

[熱硬化性成分(B)] 熱硬化性成分(B)用以使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜硬化之成分。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的熱硬化性成分(B)可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[Thermosetting component (B)] The thermosetting component (B) is a component for hardening the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation. The thermosetting component (B) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be selected arbitrarily.

作為熱硬化性成分(B),例如可舉出環氧系熱硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺、聚氨酯、不飽和聚酯、聚矽氧樹脂等,以環氧系熱硬化性樹脂為佳。Examples of the thermosetting component (B) include epoxy-based thermosetting resins, thermosetting polyimides, polyurethanes, unsaturated polyesters, and silicone resins. better.

(環氧系熱硬化性樹脂) 環氧系熱硬化性樹脂由環氧樹脂(B1)及熱硬化劑(B2)所構成。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的環氧系熱硬化性樹脂可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。(Epoxy Thermosetting Resin) The epoxy-based thermosetting resin is composed of an epoxy resin (B1) and a thermosetting agent (B2). The epoxy-based thermosetting resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be selected arbitrarily.

‧環氧樹脂(B1) 作為環氧樹脂(B1),可舉出習知物,例如可舉出多官能系環氧樹脂、聯苯化合物、雙酚A二環氧丙基酯及其氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、伸苯基骨架型環氧樹脂等2官能以上的環氧化合物。‧Epoxy resin (B1) Examples of the epoxy resin (B1) include known ones, such as polyfunctional epoxy resins, biphenyl compounds, bisphenol A diglycidyl ester and its hydride, o-cresol novolak ring Oxygen resin, dicyclopentadiene type epoxy resin, biphenyl type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenylene skeleton type epoxy resin, etc. Oxygen compounds.

作為環氧樹脂(B1),亦可使用具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂。相較於不具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂,具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂與丙烯酸系樹脂的相溶性較高。因此,藉由使用具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂,使用保護膜形成用複合片而得到之附保護膜的半導体晶片之可靠性提升。An epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group can also be used as the epoxy resin (B1). Compared with epoxy resins without unsaturated hydrocarbon groups, epoxy resins with unsaturated hydrocarbon groups have higher compatibility with acrylic resins. Therefore, by using the epoxy resin which has an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained using the composite sheet for protective film formation improves.

作為具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂,例如可舉出多官能系環氧樹脂的環氧基的一部分經轉換成為具有不飽和烴基之基而成之化合物。此種化合物例如能夠藉由將(甲基)丙烯酸或其衍生物對環氧基進行加成反應而得到。 又,作為具有不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂,例如可舉出具有不飽和烴基之基直接鍵結於構成環氧樹脂之芳香環等而成的化合物等。 不飽和烴基為具有聚合性之不飽和基,作為其具體例,可舉出乙烯基(亦稱為vinyl)、2-丙烯基(亦稱為烯丙基)、(甲基)丙烯醯基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基等,以丙烯醯基為佳。As an epoxy resin which has an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the compound which converted a part of the epoxy group of a polyfunctional epoxy resin into the group which has an unsaturated hydrocarbon group is mentioned, for example. Such a compound can be obtained by, for example, adding (meth)acrylic acid or a derivative thereof to an epoxy group. Moreover, as an epoxy resin which has an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the compound etc. which the group which has an unsaturated hydrocarbon group directly bonded to the aromatic ring etc. which comprise an epoxy resin are mentioned, for example. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group is a polymerizable unsaturated group, and specific examples thereof include vinyl (also called vinyl), 2-propenyl (also called allyl), (meth)acryl, (Meth)acrylamide group, etc., preferably acrylyl group.

環氧樹脂(B1)的數量平均分子量沒有特別限定,就熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化性、以及硬化後的保護膜強度及耐熱性的觀點而言,以300~30000為佳,以300~10000為較佳,以300~3000為特佳。The number average molecular weight of the epoxy resin (B1) is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 300 to 30,000 from the viewpoint of the curability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, and the strength and heat resistance of the cured protective film. 300~10000 is better, especially 300~3000.

在本說明書,所謂數量平均分子量,只要未特別限定,就是使用凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)法而測定之聚苯乙烯換算值。In the present specification, the number average molecular weight is a polystyrene-equivalent value measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.

環氧樹脂(B1)的環氧當量以100~1000g/eq為佳,以150~950g/eq為較佳。 在本說明書,所謂「環氧當量」,意味著含有1克當量的環氧基之環氧化合物的克數(g/eq),且能夠依照JIS K 7236:2001的方法而測定。The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin (B1) is preferably 100-1000 g/eq, more preferably 150-950 g/eq. In this specification, "epoxy equivalent" means the number of grams (g/eq) of an epoxy compound containing 1 gram equivalent of an epoxy group, and can be measured according to the method of JIS K 7236:2001.

環氧樹脂(B1)可單獨使用1種,亦可併用2種以上、併用2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。An epoxy resin (B1) may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together, and when using 2 or more types together, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

‧熱硬化劑(B2) 熱硬化劑(B2)能夠達成作為對環氧樹脂(B1)之硬化劑的功能。 作為熱硬化劑(B2),例如可舉出在1分子中具有2個以上能夠與環氧基反應的官能基之化合物。作為前述官能基,例如可舉出酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、酸基經無水物化之基等,以酚性羥基、胺基、或酸基經無水物化之基為佳,以酚性羥基或胺基為較佳。‧Thermal curing agent (B2) The thermosetting agent (B2) can function as a curing agent for the epoxy resin (B1). As a thermosetting agent (B2), the compound which has 2 or more functional groups which can react with an epoxy group in 1 molecule is mentioned, for example. As the above-mentioned functional group, for example, phenolic hydroxyl group, alcoholic hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, and acid group are anhydroused, etc., preferably, phenolic hydroxyl group, amino group, or acidic group are anhydroused. A phenolic hydroxyl group or an amino group is preferred.

熱硬化劑(B2)之中,作為具有酚性羥基之酚系硬化劑,例如可舉出多官能酚樹脂、聯苯、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯系酚樹脂、芳烷基酚樹脂等。 熱硬化劑(B2)之中,作為具有胺基之胺系硬化劑,例如可舉出二氰二胺(dicyandiamide)。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the phenolic curing agent having a phenolic hydroxyl group include polyfunctional phenolic resins, biphenyls, novolak-type phenolic resins, dicyclopentadiene-based phenolic resins, aralkyl Phenolic resin etc. Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the amine-based curing agent having an amino group include dicyandiamide (dicyandiamide).

熱硬化劑(B2)亦可具有不飽和烴基。 作為具有不飽和烴基之熱硬化劑(B2),例如可舉出酚樹脂的羥基的一部分經具有不飽和烴基之基取代而成的化合物、具有不飽和烴基之基直接鍵結在酚樹脂的芳香環而成之化合物等。 在熱硬化劑(B2)之前述不飽和烴基與上述具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂之不飽和烴基為相同物。The thermosetting agent (B2) may have an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. Examples of the thermosetting agent (B2) having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include compounds in which a part of the hydroxyl groups of a phenol resin is substituted by a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, and aromatic compounds in which a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group is directly bonded to a phenol resin. Compounds formed from rings, etc. The aforementioned unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the thermosetting agent (B2) is the same as the unsaturated hydrocarbon group of the above-mentioned epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group.

使用酚系硬化劑作為熱硬化劑(B2)時,就提升保護膜從支撐片之剝離性而言,熱硬化劑(B2)以軟化點或玻璃轉移溫度為高者為佳。When a phenolic curing agent is used as the thermosetting agent (B2), it is preferable that the thermosetting agent (B2) has a higher softening point or glass transition temperature in terms of improving the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet.

熱硬化劑(B2)之中,例如多官能酚樹脂、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯系酚樹脂、芳烷基酚樹脂等樹脂成分的數量平均分子量,以300~30000為佳,以400~10000為較佳,以500~3000為特佳。 熱硬化劑(B2)之中,例如聯苯酚、二氰二胺等非樹脂成分的分子量沒有特別限定,例如以60~500為佳。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), the number average molecular weight of resin components such as polyfunctional phenol resins, novolak-type phenol resins, dicyclopentadiene-based phenol resins, and aralkylphenol resins is preferably 300 to 30,000. 400~10000 is better, and 500~3000 is especially good. In the thermosetting agent (B2), the molecular weight of non-resin components such as biphenol and dicyandiamide is not particularly limited, and is preferably 60-500, for example.

熱硬化劑(B2)可單獨使用1種,亦可併用2種以上、併用2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。A thermosetting agent (B2) may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together, and when using 2 or more types together, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,相對於環氧樹脂(B1)的含量100質量份,熱硬化劑(B2)的含量以0.1~500質量份為佳,以1~200質量份為較佳,例如可為1~100質量份、1~50質量份、1~25質量份、及1~10質量份等的任一者。藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的前述含量為前述下限值以上,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化變為更容易進行。又,藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的前述含量為前述上限值以下,能夠減低熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的吸濕率,而且使用保護膜形成用複合片而得到的封裝體之可靠性為進一步提升。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the epoxy resin (B1). 1-200 mass parts is preferable, For example, any one of 1-100 mass parts, 1-50 mass parts, 1-25 mass parts, and 1-10 mass parts etc. is sufficient. When the said content of a thermosetting agent (B2) is more than the said lower limit, hardening of the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation will progress more easily. Moreover, when the said content of a thermosetting agent (B2) is below the said upper limit, the moisture absorption rate of the film for thermosetting protective film formation can be reduced, and the reliability of the package obtained using the composite sheet for protective film formation can be reduced. Sex is further enhanced.

在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,相對於聚合物成分(A)的含量100質量份,熱硬化性成分(B)的含量(例如環氧樹脂(B1)及熱硬化劑(B2)的總含量)以20~500質量份為佳、30~300質量份為較佳,以40~150質量份為更佳,例如可為45~100質量份、及50~80質量份等的任一者。藉由熱硬化性成分(B)的前述含量為此種範圍,例如能夠抑制保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物與支撐片的接著力、提升支撐片的剝離性。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting component (B) (such as epoxy resin (B1) and The total content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is preferably 20-500 parts by mass, more preferably 30-300 parts by mass, more preferably 40-150 parts by mass, for example, 45-100 parts by mass, and 50-300 parts by mass. Either 80 parts by mass or the like. When the content of the thermosetting component (B) is in such a range, for example, the adhesive force between the cured product of the film for protective film formation and the support sheet can be suppressed, and the peelability of the support sheet can be improved.

[硬化促進劑(C)] 保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有硬化促進劑(C)。硬化促進劑(C)用以調整保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)的硬化速度之成分。作為較佳硬化促進劑(C),例如可舉出三伸乙二胺、苄基二甲胺、三乙醇胺、二甲基胺基乙醇、參(二甲胺基甲基)苯酚等的第3級胺;2-甲基咪唑、2-苯基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等的咪唑類(1個以上的氫原子經氫原子以外的基取代之咪唑);三丁基膦、二苯基膦、三苯基膦等的有機膦類(1個以上的氫原子經有機基取代之膦);四苯基鏻四苯基硼酸鹽、三苯基膦四苯基硼酸鹽等的四苯基硼鹽等。[Hardening Accelerator (C)] The composition (III-1) for protective film formation and the film for thermosetting protective film formation may contain hardening accelerator (C). The curing accelerator (C) is a component for adjusting the curing rate of the composition (III-1) for forming a protective film. As a preferred hardening accelerator (C), for example, the third group of triethylenediamine, benzyldimethylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, ginseng (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, etc. Class amines; 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylolimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methyl -Imidazoles such as 5-hydroxymethylimidazole (imidazoles in which more than one hydrogen atom is replaced by a group other than hydrogen atoms); organic phosphines such as tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine (1 more than one hydrogen atom substituted by an organic group); tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenyl borate, tetraphenyl boron salt of triphenylphosphine tetraphenyl borate, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的硬化促進劑(C)可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The curing accelerator (C) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be one type, or two or more types. to choose.

使用硬化促進劑(C)時,在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,硬化促進劑(C)的含量相對於熱硬化性成分(B)的含量100質量份,以0.01~10質量份為佳,以0.1~7質量份為較佳。藉由硬化促進劑(C)的前述含量為前述下限值以上,藉由使用硬化促進劑(C)而得到的效果能夠更顯著。又,藉由硬化促進劑(C)的含量為前述上限值以下,例如抑制高極性硬化促進劑(C)在高溫‧高濕度條件下、在熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中往與被黏著物的接著界面側移動而偏析之效果變高,而且使用保護膜形成用複合片而得到之附保護膜的半導體晶片之可靠性為進一步提升。When the hardening accelerator (C) is used, in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is 100 parts by mass relative to the content of the thermosetting component (B), It is preferably 0.01-10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1-7 parts by mass. When the said content of a hardening accelerator (C) is more than the said lower limit, the effect obtained by using a hardening accelerator (C) can become more remarkable. In addition, when the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is not more than the aforementioned upper limit, it is possible to suppress, for example, the high-polarity hardening accelerator (C) from interfering with the substrate in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film under high temperature and high humidity conditions. The effect of segregation by movement of the adhesive interface side of the sticky material becomes higher, and the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film is further improved.

[填充材(D)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有填充材(D)。藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜為含有填充材(D),容易將前述吸水率及黏著力變化率調節成為目標範圍內。又,藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜含有填充材(D),容易調整熱膨脹數,而且藉由使該熱膨脹數對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜的形成對象物為最佳化,使用保護膜形成用複合片而得到之附保護膜的半導体晶片之可靠性為進一步提升。又,藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜為含有填充材(D),亦能夠使保護膜的吸濕率減低、或使放熱性提升。[Filler (D)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a filler (D). By containing the filler (D) in the film for thermosetting protective film formation, it becomes easy to adjust the said water absorption rate and adhesive force change rate so that they may exist in the target range. Moreover, by containing the filler (D) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the protective film, it is easy to adjust the number of thermal expansion, and by making the number of thermal expansion relative to the film for forming a thermosetting protective film or the object to be formed of the protective film For optimization, the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with protective film obtained by using the composite sheet for protective film formation is further improved. Moreover, when the film for thermosetting protective film formation contains a filler (D), the moisture absorption rate of a protective film can also be reduced, and heat dissipation can be improved.

填充材(D)可為有機填充材及無機填充材之任一種,以無機填充材為佳。 作為較佳的無機填充材,例如可舉出氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、鈦白、紅鐵粉、碳化矽、氮化硼等的粉末;將該等無機填充材球形化而成的珠粒;該等無機填充材的表面改質品;該等無機填充材的單結晶纖維;及玻璃纖維等。該等之中,無機填充材以氧化矽或氧化鋁為佳,以氧化矽為較佳。The filler (D) can be any of organic fillers and inorganic fillers, preferably inorganic fillers. Preferable inorganic fillers include, for example, powders of silicon oxide, alumina, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium dioxide, red iron powder, silicon carbide, boron nitride, etc.; these inorganic fillers are spheroidized beads; surface modified products of such inorganic fillers; single crystal fibers of such inorganic fillers; and glass fibers, etc. Among them, the inorganic filler is preferably silicon oxide or aluminum oxide, more preferably silicon oxide.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的填充材(D)可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The filler (D) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrary. to choose.

使用填充材(D)時,在組合物(III-1)中,相對於溶劑以外的全部成分的總含量,填充材(D)的含量的比例(亦即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的填充材(D)的含量)以5~80質量%為佳,10~70質量%為較佳,例如可為20~65質量%、30~65質量%、及40~65質量%等的任一者。藉由填充材(D)的含量為此種範圍,更容易調整上述的熱膨脹數,又,保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜強度進一步提升。When the filler (D) is used, in the composition (III-1), relative to the total content of all components other than the solvent, the ratio of the content of the filler (D) (that is, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film The content of the filler (D)) is preferably 5-80% by mass, more preferably 10-70% by mass, for example, 20-65% by mass, 30-65% by mass, and 40-65% by mass, etc. either. When the content of the filler (D) is within such a range, it is easier to adjust the above-mentioned coefficient of thermal expansion, and the film for protective film formation and the strength of the protective film are further improved.

[偶合劑(E)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有偶合劑(E)。藉由使用具有能夠與無機化合物或有機化合物反應的官能基之物作為偶合劑(E),能夠使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜對被黏著物的接著性及密著性提升。又,藉由使用偶合劑(E),熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物(保護膜)不會損害耐熱性且耐水性提升。[Coupling agent (E)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a coupling agent (E). By using what has the functional group which can react with an inorganic compound or an organic compound as a coupling agent (E), the adhesiveness and adhesiveness of the film for thermosetting protective film formation to an adherend can be improved. Moreover, by using a coupling agent (E), the hardened|cured material (protective film) of the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation does not impair heat resistance, and water resistance improves.

偶合劑(E)以具有能夠與聚合物成分(A)、熱硬化性成分(B)等所具有的官能基反應之官能基之化合物為佳,以矽烷偶合劑為較佳。 作為較佳前述矽烷偶合劑,例如可舉出3-環氧丙氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、2-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-(苯基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-苯胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-醯基尿素(ureide)丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-巰基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-巰基丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、雙(3-三乙氧基矽基丙基)四硫醚(sulfane)、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷、乙烯基三甲氧基矽烷、乙烯基三乙醯氧基矽烷、咪唑矽烷等。The coupling agent (E) is preferably a compound having a functional group capable of reacting with a functional group possessed by the polymer component (A) or the thermosetting component (B), and is preferably a silane coupling agent. As a preferred aforementioned silane coupling agent, for example, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, Propyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxymethyldiethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxy Propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyl Methyldiethoxysilane, 3-(phenylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-anilinopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-acylurea (ureide)propyltrimethoxysilane , 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis(3-triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfide (sulfane), methyltrimethoxysilane , Methyltriethoxysilane, Vinyltrimethoxysilane, Vinyltriacetoxysilane, Imidazolesilane, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的偶合劑(E)可只有1種,亦可為2種以上,為2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The coupling agent (E) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrary. to choose.

使用偶合劑(E)時,在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之偶合劑(E)的含量,相對於聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)的總含量100質量份,以0.03~20質量份為佳,以0.05~10質量份為較佳,以0.1~5質量份為特佳。藉由偶合劑(E)的前述含量為前述下限值以上,填充材(D)在樹脂的分散性提升、熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與被黏著物的接著性提升等、藉由使用偶合劑(E)所得到的效果能夠更顯著。又,藉由偶合劑(E)的前述含量為前述上限值以下,能夠進一步抑制產生逸氣。When the coupling agent (E) is used, the content of the coupling agent (E) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, relative to the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B) The total content of 100 parts by mass is preferably 0.03 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by mass. When the above-mentioned content of the coupling agent (E) is more than the above-mentioned lower limit value, the dispersibility of the filler (D) in the resin is improved, the adhesiveness between the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and an adherend is improved, etc., and by using The effect obtained by the coupling agent (E) can be more remarkable. Moreover, when the said content of a coupling agent (E) is below the said upper limit, generation|occurrence|production of outgassing can be suppressed further.

[交聯劑(F)] 作為聚合物成分(A),使用上述丙烯酸系樹脂等的具有能夠與其它化合物鍵結的乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等的官能基之物時,組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有交聯劑(F)。交聯劑(F)是用以使聚合物成分(A)中之前述官能基與其它化合物鍵結而交聯之成分,藉由如此的交聯,能夠調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的初期接著力及凝聚力。[Crosslinking agent (F)] As the polymer component (A), when using a functional group such as the above-mentioned acrylic resin, such as a vinyl group, (meth)acryl group, amine group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, isocyanate group, etc. , The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a crosslinking agent (F). The cross-linking agent (F) is a component for cross-linking the aforementioned functional group in the polymer component (A) with other compounds. Through such cross-linking, it is possible to adjust the thickness of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film. Initial adhesion and cohesion.

作為交聯劑(F),例如可舉出有機多元異氰酸酯化合物、有機多元亞胺化合物、金屬螯合物系交聯劑(具有金屬螯合物構造的交聯劑)、吖環丙烷糸交聯劑(具有吖環丙烷基的交聯劑)等。Examples of the crosslinking agent (F) include organic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, organic polyvalent imine compounds, metal chelate crosslinking agents (crosslinking agents having a metal chelate structure), aziridine crosslinking agents, etc. agent (crosslinking agent with aziridine group), etc.

作為前述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物,例如可舉出芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物及脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物(以下,有將該等化合物彙總而略記為「芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等」之情形);前述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等的三聚物、三聚異氰酸酯體及加成物;使前述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等與多元醇化合物反應而得到的末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚合物等。前述「加成物」意味著前述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物或脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物、與乙二醇、丙二醇、新戊二醇、三羥甲基丙烷或蓖麻油等含低分子活性氫的化合物之反應物。作為前述加成物的例子,可舉出如後述之三羥甲基丙烷的二甲苯撐基二異氰酸酯加成物等。又,所謂「末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物」,如前面已說明者。Examples of the organic polyvalent isocyanate compound include aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, aliphatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, and alicyclic polyvalent isocyanate compounds (hereinafter, these compounds are collectively referred to as "aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc.") case); trimers, isocyanate bodies, and adducts of the aforementioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc.; terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymers obtained by reacting the aforementioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc., with polyol compounds, etc. . The aforementioned "adduct" means the aforementioned aromatic polyisocyanate compound, aliphatic polyisocyanate compound, or alicyclic polyisocyanate compound, and ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, trimethylolpropane, or castor oil, etc. Reactant of low molecular active hydrogen compounds. As an example of the said adduct, the xylylene diisocyanate adduct of trimethylolpropane mentioned later etc. are mentioned. Also, the "isocyanate-terminated urethane prepolymer" is as described above.

作為前述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物,更具體地,例如可舉出2,4-甲伸苯二異氰酸酯;2,6-甲伸苯二異氰酸酯;1,3-二甲苯撐基二異氰酸酯;1,4-二甲苯二異氰酸酯;二苯基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二苯基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;3-甲基二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯;六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;三羥甲基丙烷等的多元醇的全部或一部分的羥基附加甲苯二異氰酸酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯及二甲苯撐基二異氰酸酯的任1種或2種以上而成之化合物;離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。As the aforementioned organic polyvalent isocyanate compound, more specifically, for example, 2,4-mylene diisocyanate; 2,6-mylene diisocyanate; 1,3-xylylene diisocyanate; 1,4- Xylene diisocyanate; Diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; Diphenylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; 3-Methyldiphenylmethane diisocyanate; Hexamethylene diisocyanate; Phorne diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; trimethylolpropane and other polyols, all or part of the hydroxy added toluene di Any one or two or more compounds of isocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate and xylylene diisocyanate; lysine diisocyanate, etc.

作為前述有機多元亞胺化合物,例如可舉出N,N’-二苯基甲烷-4,4’-雙(1-吖環丙烷羧醯胺)、三羥甲基丙烷-三-β-吖環丙烷基丙酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷-三-β-吖環丙烷基丙酸酯、N,N’-甲苯-2,4-雙(1-吖環丙烷羧醯胺)三伸乙基三聚氰胺等。Examples of the aforementioned organic polyimine compounds include N,N'-diphenylmethane-4,4'-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide), trimethylolpropane-tri-β-acridine Cyclopropanyl propionate, tetramethylolmethane-tri-β-aziridine propionate, N,N'-toluene-2,4-bis(1-aziridine carboxamide) triethylene base melamine etc.

使用有機多元異氰酸酯化合物作為交聯劑(F)時,以使用含羥基的聚合物作為聚合物成分(A)為佳。交聯劑(F)具有異氰酸酯基且聚合物成分(A)具有羥基時,藉由交聯劑(F)與聚合物成分(A)反應,能夠簡便地將交聯結構導入至熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜。When using an organic polyvalent isocyanate compound as the crosslinking agent (F), it is preferable to use a hydroxyl group-containing polymer as the polymer component (A). When the crosslinking agent (F) has an isocyanate group and the polymer component (A) has a hydroxyl group, by reacting the crosslinking agent (F) with the polymer component (A), it is possible to easily introduce a crosslinked structure into the thermosetting protection A thin film for film formation.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的交聯劑(F)可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The crosslinking agent (F) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can Choose arbitrarily.

使用交聯劑(F)時,在組合物(III-1)之交聯劑(F)的含量,相對於聚合物成分(A)的含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.1~10質量份為較佳,以0.5~5質量份為特佳。藉由交聯劑(F)的前述含量為前述下限值以上,經由使用交聯劑(F)而得到的效果能夠更顯著。又,藉由交聯劑(F)的前述含量為前述上限值以下,能夠抑制交聯劑(F)的過剩使用。When using a crosslinking agent (F), the content of the crosslinking agent (F) in the composition (III-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (A), It is preferably 0.1-10 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.5-5 parts by mass. When the said content of a crosslinking agent (F) is more than the said lower limit, the effect obtained by using a crosslinking agent (F) can become more remarkable. Moreover, the excessive use of a crosslinking agent (F) can be suppressed by the said content of a crosslinking agent (F) being below the said upper limit.

[能量線硬化性樹脂(G)] 組合物(III-1)亦可含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)。熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜藉由含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G),而能夠藉由照射能量線使特性產生變化。[energy ray curable resin (G)] The composition (III-1) may contain an energy ray curable resin (G). The thin film for thermosetting protective film formation can change a characteristic by irradiating an energy ray by containing an energy ray curable resin (G).

能量線硬化性樹脂(G)是能夠將能量線硬化性化合物聚合(硬化)而得到之物。 作為前述能量線硬化性化合物,例如可舉出在分子內具有至少1個聚合性雙鍵之化合物,以具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之丙烯酸酯系化合物為佳。The energy ray-curable resin (G) can be obtained by polymerizing (curing) an energy ray-curable compound. Examples of the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound include compounds having at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule, preferably acrylate compounds having a (meth)acryl group.

作為前述丙烯酸酯系化合物,例如可舉出三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇一羥基五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等含鏈狀脂肪族骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;二(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等含環狀脂肪族骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的聚伸烷基二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯;寡聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物;環氧改質(甲基)丙烯酸酯;前述聚伸烷基二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外的聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;伊康酸寡聚物等。Examples of the acrylate-based compounds include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, tetramethylolmethane tetra(meth)acrylate, neopentylitol tri(meth)acrylate, neopentylthritol tri(meth)acrylate, Pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, Dineopentylthritol monohydroxypenta(meth)acrylate, Dineopentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,4-Butanediol bis(meth)acrylate ) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate and other (meth)acrylates containing chain aliphatic skeleton; dicyclopentanyl di(meth)acrylate and other containing cycloaliphatic skeleton (meth)acrylates; polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylates such as polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylates; oligoester (meth)acrylates; urethane (meth)acrylates base) acrylate oligomers; epoxy-modified (meth)acrylates; polyether (meth)acrylates other than the aforementioned polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylates; itaconic acid oligomers, etc. .

前述能量線硬化性化合物的重量平均分子量以100~30000為佳,以300~10000為較佳。The weight average molecular weight of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 100-30000, more preferably 300-10000.

在聚合所使用的前述能量線硬化性化合物可為1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The energy ray-curable compound used for polymerization may be 1 type, or 2 or more types, and when 2 or more types are used, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

組合物(III-1)所含有的能量線硬化性樹脂(G)可只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The energy ray curable resin (G) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

使用能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的情況,相對於組合物(III-1)的溶劑以外之全部成分的總含量,能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的含量以1~95質量%為佳,以5~90質量%為較佳,以10~85質量%為特佳。When using the energy ray curable resin (G), the content of the energy ray curable resin (G) is preferably 1 to 95% by mass relative to the total content of all components other than the solvent of the composition (III-1), It is preferably 5-90% by mass, particularly preferably 10-85% by mass.

[光聚合起始劑(H)] 組合物(III-1)含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)時,為了效率良好地進行能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的聚合反應,亦可含有光聚合起始劑(H)。[Photopolymerization initiator (H)] When the composition (III-1) contains the energy ray curable resin (G), it may contain a photopolymerization initiator (H) in order to efficiently advance the polymerization reaction of the energy ray curable resin (G).

作為在組合物(III-1)之光聚合起始劑(H),例如可舉出苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻苯甲酸、苯偶姻苯甲酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等的苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等的苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等的醯基氧化膦化合物;苄基苯基硫醚、四甲基秋蘭姆一硫醚等的硫醚化合物;1-羥基環己基苯基酮等的α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等的偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等的二茂鈦化合物;9-氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
(thioxanthone)等的9-氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化物化合物;聯乙醯等的二酮化合物;二苯基乙二酮(benzil);聯苄(dibenzyl);二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基9-氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯基甲烷;2-羥基-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。又,作為前述光聚合起始劑,例如亦能夠使用1-氯蒽醌等的醌化合物;胺等的光敏化劑等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl Benzoin compounds such as ether, benzoin benzoic acid, methyl benzoin benzoate, benzoin dimethyl ketal, etc.; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane- Acetophenone compounds such as 1-ketone and 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)benzene Acyl phosphine oxide compounds such as phosphine oxide and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl diphenyl phosphine oxide; sulfides such as benzyl phenyl sulfide and tetramethylthiuram monosulfide Compounds; α-ketol compounds such as 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; 9-oxosulfur
Figure 02_image001
(thioxanthone) and other 9-oxosulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; peroxide compounds; diketone compounds such as diacetyl; benzil; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyl 9-oxythiol
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone, etc. Moreover, as said photoinitiator, the quinone compound, such as 1-chloroanthraquinone, the photosensitizer, etc. of an amine, etc. can also be used, for example.

組合物(III-1)所含有之光聚合起始劑(H)可為1種,亦可為2種以上,為2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The photoinitiator (H) contained in composition (III-1) may be 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when it is 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

使用光聚合起始劑(H)時,組合物(III-1)之光聚合起始劑(H)的含量,相對於能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的含量100質量份,以0.1~20質量份為佳,以1~10質量份為較佳,以2~5質量份為特佳。When using a photopolymerization initiator (H), the content of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) is 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the energy ray-curable resin (G). Parts by mass are preferred, preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass, particularly preferably 2 to 5 parts by mass.

[著色劑(I)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有著色劑(I)。作為著色劑(I),例如可舉出無機系顏料、有機系顏料、有機系染料等習知物。[Color (I)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a colorant (I). Examples of the colorant (I) include conventional ones such as inorganic pigments, organic pigments, and organic dyes.

作為前述有機系顏料及有機系染料,例如可舉出胺鎓系色素、花青系色素、部花青素系色素、克酮鎓(croconium)系色素、角鯊烯鎓(squalium)系色素、薁鎓(azulenium)系色素、多次甲基(polymethine)系色素、萘醌系色素、吡喃鎓系色素、酞花青系色素、萘酞花青(naphthalocyanine)系色素、萘內醯胺(naphtholactam)系色素、偶氮系色素、縮合偶氮系色素、靛藍系色素、紫環酮(perinone)系色素、苝系色素、二㗁系色素、喹吖酮(quinacridone)系色素、異吲哚啉酮系色素、喹啉黃(quinophthalone)系色素、吡咯系色素、硫靛藍(thioindigo)系色素、金屬錯合物系色素(金屬錯鹽染料)、二硫醇金屬錯合物系色素、吲哚酚系色素、三烯丙基甲烷系色素、蒽醌系色素、二㗁系色素、萘酚系色素、甲亞胺系色素、苯并咪唑酮系色素、皮蒽酮(pyranthron)系色素及士林(threne)系色等。Examples of the aforementioned organic pigments and organic dyes include amine-based dyes, cyanine-based dyes, merocyanidin-based dyes, croconium-based dyes, squalium-based dyes, Azulenium-based pigments, polymethine-based pigments, naphthoquinone-based pigments, pyrylium-based pigments, phthalocyanine-based pigments, naphthalocyanine-based pigments, naphthalenamide ( naphtholactam) pigments, azo pigments, condensed azo pigments, indigo pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, quinacridone pigments, isoindoline Dorinone dyes, quinophthalone dyes, pyrrole dyes, thioindigo dyes, metal complex dyes (metal complex dyes), dithiol metal complex dyes, Indoxyl-based pigments, triallylmethane-based pigments, anthraquinone-based pigments, di㗁-based pigments, naphthol-based pigments, imine-based pigments, benzimidazolone-based pigments, and pyranthron-based pigments Pigments and threne-based colors, etc.

作為前述無機系顏料,例如可舉出碳黑、鈷系色素、鐵索色素、鉻系色素、鈦系色素、釩系色素、鋯系色素、鉬系色素、釕系色素、鉑系色素、ITO(氧化銦錫)系色素、ATO(氧化銻錫)系色素等。Examples of the aforementioned inorganic pigments include carbon black, cobalt-based pigments, ferric pigments, chromium-based pigments, titanium-based pigments, vanadium-based pigments, zirconium-based pigments, molybdenum-based pigments, ruthenium-based pigments, platinum-based pigments, ITO ( Indium tin oxide) based pigments, ATO (antimony tin oxide) based pigments, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的著色劑(I)可為1種,亦可為2種以上,為2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The coloring agent (I) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be 1 type, or 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrary. to choose.

使用著色劑(I)時,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)之含量,按照目的而適當地調節即可。例如,藉由調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量、調節保護膜的光透射性,藉此,在對保護膜施行雷射印字的情況時,能夠調節印字視認性。又,藉由調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量,亦能夠使保護膜的設計性提升、或使半導體晶圓的背面之磨削痕不容易看到。考慮此點時,相對於保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)之溶劑以外的全部成分的總含量,著色劑(I)的含量比例(亦即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之著色劑(I)的含量)以0.1~10質量%為佳,以0.1~7.5質量%為較佳,以0.1~5質量%為特佳。藉由著色劑(I)的前述含量為前述下限值以上,藉由使用著色劑(I)而得到的效果能夠更顯著。又,藉由著色劑(I)的前述含量為前述上限值以下,能夠抑制熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的光透射性過度低落。When using a coloring agent (I), what is necessary is just to adjust content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for thermosetting protective film formation suitably according to the objective. For example, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) in the thermosetting protective film-forming film and adjusting the light transmittance of the protective film, the visibility of printed characters can be adjusted when laser printing is performed on the protective film. Moreover, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) of the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation, the design property of a protective film can be improved, and the grinding mark on the back surface of a semiconductor wafer can also be made difficult to see. In consideration of this point, the content ratio of the coloring agent (I) (that is, the coloring of the thermosetting protective film forming film) relative to the total content of all components other than the solvent of the protective film forming composition (III-1) The content of agent (I)) is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7.5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. When the said content of a coloring agent (I) is more than the said lower limit, the effect obtained by using a coloring agent (I) can become more remarkable. Moreover, when the said content of a coloring agent (I) is below the said upper limit, it can suppress that the light transmittance of the film for thermosetting protective film formation falls too much.

[泛用添加劑(J)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,亦可含有泛用添加劑(J)。 泛用添加劑(J)可為習知物,亦能夠按照目的而任意地選擇,沒有特別限定,作為較佳之物,例如可舉出可塑劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、除氣劑等。[Universal Additive (J)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a general-purpose additive (J) within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. The general-purpose additive (J) can be a conventional one, and can also be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and is not particularly limited. Examples of preferable ones include plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, degassers, and the like.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的泛用添加劑(J)可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之泛用添加劑(J)的含量沒有特別限定,按照目的而適當地選擇即可。The general-purpose additive (J) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be Choose arbitrarily. The content of the general-purpose additive (J) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose.

[溶劑] 組合物(III-1)以進一步含有溶劑為佳。含有溶劑之保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)能夠使操作性變為良好。 前述溶劑沒有特別限定,作為較佳之物,例如可舉出甲苯、二甲苯等的烴;甲醇、乙醇、2-丙醇、異丁醇(2-甲基丙烷-1-醇)、1-丁醇等的醇類;乙酸乙酯等的酯;丙酮、甲基乙基酮等的酮;四氫呋喃等的醚;二甲基甲醯胺、N-甲基吡咯啶酮等的醯胺(具有醯胺鍵之化合物)等。 組合物(III-1)所含有的溶劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,溶劑為2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。[solvent] Composition (III-1) preferably further contains a solvent. The composition (III-1) for protective film formation containing a solvent can make handleability favorable. The aforementioned solvents are not particularly limited, but preferred examples include hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, isobutanol (2-methylpropan-1-ol), 1-butanol Alcohols such as alcohol; Esters such as ethyl acetate; Ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; Amides such as dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone (with amide Compounds with amine bonds), etc. The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds. When there are two or more kinds of solvents, the combinations and ratios thereof can be arbitrarily selected.

就能夠使用組合物(III-1)中的含有成分更均勻地混合而言,組合物(III-1)所含有的溶劑以甲基乙基酮等為佳。The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) is preferably methyl ethyl ketone or the like because the components contained in the composition (III-1) can be mixed more uniformly.

>>熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(III-1)等的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,能夠藉由調配用以構成該組合物之各成分而得到。 在調配各成分調配時之添加順序沒有特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一種調配成分混合,藉由將該調配成分預先稀釋而使用,亦可不將溶劑以外的任一種調配成分預先稀釋,藉由將溶劑與該等調配成分進行混合而使用。 調配時混合各成分之方法沒有特別限定,從使攪拌子或攪拌葉等旋轉而混合之方法;使用混合機而混合之方法;及施加超音波而混合之方法等習知的方法適當地選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時之溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不劣化,就沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可,溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Method for producing thermosetting protective film-forming composition>> Compositions for forming a thermosetting protective film such as composition (III-1) can be obtained by preparing each component for constituting the composition. The order of adding each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added at the same time. When using a solvent, the solvent may be mixed with any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent and used by diluting the prepared ingredients in advance, or may be used without pre-diluting any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent, and the solvent may be mixed with the prepared ingredients Mixed and used. There is no particular limitation on the method of mixing the ingredients during preparation, and it can be appropriately selected from known methods such as a method of mixing by rotating a stirring bar or a stirring blade, a method of mixing by using a mixer, and a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Can. The temperature and time of adding and mixing each component are not particularly limited as long as the ingredients are not degraded, and can be adjusted appropriately. The temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

○能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 作為能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,可舉出含有能量線硬化性成分(a)之物,以含有能量線硬化性成分(a)及填充材之物為佳。 在能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,能量線硬化性成分(a)以未硬化為佳,以具有黏著性為佳,以未硬化且具有黏著性為較佳。在此,所謂「能量線」及「能量線硬化性」,如前面已說明。○Films for forming energy ray curable protective films Examples of the energy ray-curable protective film forming film include those containing the energy ray-curable component (a), preferably those containing the energy ray-curable component (a) and a filler. In the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film, the energy ray curable component (a) is preferably uncured, preferably has adhesiveness, and is preferably uncured and has adhesiveness. Here, the so-called "energy ray" and "energy ray curability" are as described above.

將能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附在半導體晶圓背面之後,使其硬化時之硬化條件,只要硬化物充分地發揮其功能的程度之硬化度,就沒有特別限定,按照能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類而適當地選擇即可。 例如在能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化時,能量線的照度以120~280mW/cm2 為佳。而且在前述硬化時之能量線的光量以100~1000mJ/cm2 為佳。There are no particular limitations on the curing conditions when the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer and then cured, as long as the degree of hardening is such that the cured product can fully perform its function. What is necessary is just to select suitably according to the kind of thin film for protective film formation. For example, when curing a film for forming an energy ray curable protective film, the illuminance of the energy ray is preferably 120 to 280 mW/cm 2 . In addition, the light quantity of the energy ray at the time of curing is preferably 100~1000mJ/cm 2 .

>能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(IV-1)> 作為較佳能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,例如可舉出含有前述能量線硬化性成分(a)之能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(IV-1)(在本說明書,有只有略記為「組合物(IV-1)」之情形)等。>Energy ray curable protective film forming composition (IV-1)> As a preferable composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film, for example, the composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film (IV-1) containing the aforementioned energy ray curable component (a) can be mentioned (in this specification, there is Only when it is abbreviated as "composition (IV-1)", etc.).

[能量線硬化性成分(a)] 能量線硬化性成分(a)是藉由照射能量線而硬化之成分,對能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等之同時,亦是用以在硬化後形成硬質的保護膜之成分。 作為能量線硬化性成分(a),例如可舉出具有能量線硬化性基之重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1)、及具有能量線硬化性基之分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)。前述聚合物(a1)其至少一部分可經交聯劑交聯,亦可不經交聯。[energy ray hardening ingredient (a)] The energy ray curable component (a) is a component that is cured by irradiation of energy ray, and is used to form a hard film after curing while imparting film-forming properties, flexibility, etc. to the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film. Components of the protective film. Examples of the energy ray-curable component (a) include polymers (a1) having an energy ray-curable group with a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000, and compounds having an energy ray-curable group with a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000 (a2). At least a part of the aforementioned polymer (a1) may be cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, or may not be cross-linked.

(具有能量線硬化性基之重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1)) 作為具有能量線硬化性基之重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1),例如可舉出具有能夠與其它化合物所具有的基反應的官能基之丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)、與具有與前述官能基反應之基、及具有能量線硬化性雙鍵等的能量線硬化性基之能量線硬化性化合物(a12)反應而成之丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)。(Polymer (a1) having a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 having an energy ray curable group) Examples of the polymer (a1) having an energy-ray-curable group and a weight-average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 include an acrylic polymer (a11) having a functional group capable of reacting with a group of another compound, and an acrylic polymer (a11) having a An acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by reacting an energy ray-curable compound (a12) having an energy ray-curable group having an energy ray-curable group such as an energy ray-curable double bond and a group reactive with the aforementioned functional group.

作為能夠與其它化合物所具有的基反應的前述官能基,例如可舉出羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基(胺基的1個或2個氫原子經氫原子以外的基取代而成之基)、環氧基等。但是就防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片等電路的腐蝕的觀點而言,前述官能基以羧基以外的基為佳。 該等之中,前述官能基以羥基為佳。Examples of the functional group capable of reacting with groups of other compounds include hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, amino group, substituted amino group (one or two hydrogen atoms of the amino group are replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms) group), epoxy group, etc. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of circuits such as semiconductor wafers and semiconductor wafers, the aforementioned functional groups are preferably groups other than carboxyl groups. Among them, the aforementioned functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group.

‧具有官能基之丙烯酸系聚合物(a11) 作為具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系聚合物(a11),例如可舉出具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體、與不具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體共聚合而成之物,亦可為該等單體以外,進一步與丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)共聚合而成之物。 又,前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)可為無規共聚物,亦可為嵌段共聚物,針對聚合方法,能夠採用習知的方法。‧Acrylic polymer with functional groups (a11) Examples of the acrylic polymer (a11) having the aforementioned functional groups include copolymers of acrylic monomers having the aforementioned functional groups and acrylic monomers that do not have the aforementioned functional groups. In addition to other monomers, it is further copolymerized with monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers). Moreover, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and a known method can be used for the polymerization method.

作為具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體,例如可舉出含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、含取代胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。As an acrylic monomer which has the said functional group, a hydroxyl group containing monomer, a carboxyl group containing monomer, an amino group containing monomer, a substituted amino group containing monomer, an epoxy group containing monomer etc. are mentioned, for example.

作為前述含羥基單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸羥基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基丁酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇類等的非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(不具有(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架之不飽和醇)等。Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer include hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, Hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as propyl, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate; vinyl alcohol, olefin Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as propanols (unsaturated alcohols not having a (meth)acryl skeleton) and the like.

作為前述含羧基的單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等的乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等的乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之二羧酸);前述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酐;甲基丙烯酸2-羧基乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羧基烷酯等。As the aforementioned carboxyl group-containing monomers, for example, ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids having ethylenically unsaturated bonds) such as (meth)acrylic acid and crotonic acid; Ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids (dicarboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated bond) such as acid, maleic acid, and citraconic acid; anhydrides of the aforementioned ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxymethacrylic acid Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate such as ethyl ester, etc.

含前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體以含羥基單體為佳。The acrylic monomers containing the aforementioned functional groups are preferably hydroxyl-containing monomers.

構成前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)之含前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The functional group-containing acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. When there are two or more types, such combinations and ratios can be selected arbitrarily.

作為不具有前述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯十二酸(亦稱為(甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯(亦稱為(甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯(亦稱為(甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯(亦稱為(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酸酯)等構成烷酯之烷基是碳數為1~18的鏈狀結構之(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯。Examples of acrylic monomers that do not have the aforementioned functional groups include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, Butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, second-butyl (meth)acrylate, third-butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth) Hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate , isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic dodecanoic acid (also known as lauryl (meth)acrylate), (meth)acrylate base) tridecyl acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate (also known as myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (also known as (Meth)acrylic palmityl ester), (meth)acrylic acid heptadecyl, (meth)acrylic acid octadecyl (also known as (meth)acrylic acid stearate) and other alkyl esters are carbon numbers It is an alkyl (meth)acrylate with a chain structure of 1~18.

又,作為不具有前述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,例如亦可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯等的含烷氧基烷基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳酯等具有芳香族基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;非交聯性(甲基)丙烯醯胺及其衍生物;(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基丙酯等具有非交聯性3級胺基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。Moreover, as an acrylic monomer which does not have the said functional group, the methoxymethyl (meth)acrylate, the methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, the ethoxymethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. are also mentioned, for example. Alkoxyalkyl-containing (meth)acrylates such as esters, ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylates, etc.; aromatic (meth)acrylates such as aryl (meth)acrylates such as phenyl (meth)acrylates, etc. (Meth)acrylates; non-crosslinkable (meth)acrylamide and its derivatives; N,N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, N,N-dimethacrylate Non-crosslinkable tertiary amine groups (meth)acrylates such as methylaminopropyl ester, etc.

構成前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)之不具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體可只有1種,亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The acrylic monomer which does not have the said functional group which comprises the said acrylic polymer (a11) may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types.

作為前述非丙烯酸系單體,例如可舉出乙烯、降莰烯等的烯烴;乙酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。 構成前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)之前述非丙烯酸系單體可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。Examples of the non-acrylic monomer include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene. The said non-acrylic monomer which comprises the said acrylic polymer (a11) may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11),相對於構成其之結構單元的總量,從具有前述官能基之丙烯酸系單體衍生的結構單元之量的比例(含量)以0.1~50質量%為佳,以1~40質量%為較佳,以3~30質量%為特佳。藉由前述比例為此種範圍,在藉由前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)與前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)共聚合而得到的前述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1),能量線硬化性基的含量能夠容易地將保護膜的硬化程度調節成為較佳範圍。In the acrylic polymer (a11), the ratio (content) of the structural unit derived from the acrylic monomer having the functional group to the total amount of the structural units constituting it is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass. , preferably 1 to 40% by mass, particularly preferably 3 to 30% by mass. With the aforementioned ratio in such a range, in the aforementioned acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by copolymerizing the aforementioned acrylic polymer (a11) and the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12), the energy ray-curable group The content of can easily adjust the hardening degree of the protective film to a preferable range.

構成前述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)之前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The said acrylic polymer (a11) which comprises the said acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在組合物(IV-1),相對於溶劑以外的成分的總含量,丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的含量比例(亦即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的含量)以1~70質量%為佳,以5~60質量%為較佳,以10~50質量%為特佳。In the composition (IV-1), the content ratio of the acrylic resin (a1-1) relative to the total content of components other than the solvent (that is, the acrylic resin (a1-1) of the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film The content of 1) is preferably 1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by mass.

‧能量線硬化性化合物(a12) 前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),以具有選自由異氰酸酯基、環氧基及羧基所組成群組之1種或2種以上作為能夠與前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)所具有的官能基反應之基之物為佳,以具有異氰酸酯基作為前述基之物為較佳。前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),例如具有異氰酸酯基作為前述基時,該異氰酸酯基容易與具有羥基作為前述官能基之丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)的該羥基反應。‧Energy ray hardening compound (a12) The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) has one or more kinds selected from the group consisting of isocyanate group, epoxy group, and carboxyl group as the functional group capable of reacting with the aforementioned acrylic polymer (a11). Those having an isocyanate group as the aforementioned group are preferred. For example, when the energy ray-curable compound (a12) has an isocyanate group as the group, the isocyanate group easily reacts with the hydroxyl group of the acrylic polymer (a11) having a hydroxyl group as the functional group.

前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),以在1分子中具有1~5個前述能量線硬化性基為佳,以具有1~3個為較佳。The energy ray-curable compound (a12) preferably has 1 to 5 energy ray-curable groups per molecule, more preferably 1 to 3 groups.

作為前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),例如可舉出2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙基異氰酸酯、間異丙烯基-α,α-二甲基苄基異氰酸酯、甲基丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、烯丙基異氰酸酯、1,1-(雙丙烯醯氧基甲基)乙基異氰酸酯; 藉由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與(甲基)丙烯酸羥基乙酯反應而得到的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物; 藉由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與多元醇化合物與(甲基)丙烯酸羥基乙酯反應而得到的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物等。 該等之中,前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)以2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙基異氰酸酯為佳。Examples of the energy ray-curing compound (a12) include 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate, m-isopropenyl-α,α-dimethylbenzyl isocyanate, methacryl isocyanate, Allyl isocyanate, 1,1-(bisacryloxymethyl)ethyl isocyanate; Acryl monoisocyanate compounds obtained by reacting diisocyanate compounds or polyisocyanate compounds with hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate; Acryl monoisocyanate compounds obtained by reacting diisocyanate compounds or polyisocyanate compounds with polyol compounds and hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Among them, 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate is preferable as the aforementioned energy ray curable compound (a12).

構成前述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)之前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)可只有1種亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) constituting the aforementioned acrylic resin (a1-1) may be one type or two or more types, and when there are two or more types, the combinations and ratios thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

在前述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1),相對於源自前述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)之前述官能基的含量,源自前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)之能量線硬化性基含量的比率以20~120莫耳%為佳,以35~100莫耳%為較佳,以50~100莫耳%為特佳。藉由前述含量的比率為此種範圍,硬化後的保護膜的接著力變為較大。又,前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)為一官能(在一分子中具有1個前述基)化合物時,前述含量的比率之上限值為100莫耳%,前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)為多官能(在一分子中具有2個以上的前述基)化合物時,前述含量的比率之上限值有大於100莫耳%之情形。The ratio of the content of the energy ray-curable group derived from the energy ray-curable compound (a12) to the content of the functional group derived from the acrylic polymer (a11) in the acrylic resin (a1-1) It is preferably 20-120 mol%, more preferably 35-100 mol%, and particularly preferably 50-100 mol%. When the ratio of the said content is such a range, the adhesive force of the protective film after hardening becomes large. Also, when the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) is a monofunctional (having one of the aforementioned groups in one molecule) compound, the upper limit of the ratio of the aforementioned content is 100 mol%, and the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12 ) is a polyfunctional (having two or more of the aforementioned groups in one molecule) compound, the upper limit of the ratio of the aforementioned content may exceed 100 mol%.

前述聚合物(a1)的重量平均分子量(Mw),以100000~2000000為佳,以300000~1500000為較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the aforementioned polymer (a1) is preferably 100,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably 300,000 to 1,500,000.

前述聚合物(a1)其至少一部分經交聯劑交聯而成的情況時,前述聚合物(a1)不歸屬於在前述構成丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)之物已說明之上述的單體的任一者,而且可為具有與交聯劑反應之基之單體聚合且在與前述交聯劑反應之基交聯而成之物,亦可為與源自前述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)之與前述官能基反應之基交聯而成之物。When at least a part of the aforementioned polymer (a1) is cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, the aforementioned polymer (a1) does not belong to the above-mentioned monomers described in the aforementioned constituents of the acrylic polymer (a11). Either one, and it may be a monomer having a group reactive with a crosslinking agent polymerized and crosslinked at the group reactive with the crosslinking agent, or may be combined with the aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12 ) is a product formed by cross-linking with the group reacted with the aforementioned functional group.

組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有之前述聚合物(a1)可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The aforementioned polymer (a1) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be one type or two or more types. When there are two or more types, the combination and ratio of these polymers can Choose arbitrarily.

(具有能量線硬化性基之分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)) 具有能量線硬化性基之分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)中,作為前述能量線硬化性基,可舉出含有能量線硬化性雙鍵之基,作為較佳之物,可舉出(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基等。(Compound (a2) having a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000 having an energy ray hardening group) In the compound (a2) having an energy ray curable group with a molecular weight of 100 to 80000, examples of the energy ray curable group include a group containing an energy ray curable double bond, and preferred examples include (a base) acryl, vinyl, etc.

前述化合物(a2)只要是滿足上述條件之物,就沒有特別限定,具有能量線硬化性基之低分子量化合物,可舉出具有能量線硬化性基之環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基之酚樹脂等。The aforementioned compound (a2) is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above conditions, and examples of low-molecular-weight compounds having energy ray-curable groups include epoxy resins having energy ray-curable groups, and epoxy resins having energy ray-curable groups. Phenolic resin etc.

前述化合物(a2)之中,作為具有能量線硬化性基之低分子量化合物,例如可舉出多官能的單體或寡聚物等,以具有(甲基)丙烯醯基之丙烯酸酯系化合物為佳。 作為前述丙烯酸酯系化合物,例如可舉出甲基丙烯酸2-羥基-3-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙氧基化乙氧基化雙酚A二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基聚乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、乙氧基化雙酚A二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基二乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、9,9-雙[4-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基]茀、2,2-雙[4-[(甲基)丙烯醯氧基聚丙氧基)苯基]丙烷、三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,10-癸烷二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚四亞甲二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯;乙氧基化聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2-羥基-1,3-二(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙烷等的2官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 參(2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基)三聚異氰酸酯、ε-己內酯改質參-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基)三聚異氰酸酯、乙氧基化甘油三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、雙三羥甲基丙烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、環氧化新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等。Among the aforementioned compounds (a2), examples of low-molecular-weight compounds having energy-ray-curable groups include polyfunctional monomers or oligomers, and acrylate-based compounds having (meth)acryl groups are used as examples. good. Examples of the acrylate-based compounds include 2-hydroxy-3-(meth)acryloxypropyl methacrylate, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, propoxylated ethoxypropyl bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxypolyethoxy)phenyl]propane, ethoxylated bisphenol A bis(methyl) ) acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxydiethoxy)phenyl]propane, 9,9-bis[4-(2-(meth)acryloxy Ethoxy)phenyl] fennel, 2,2-bis[4-[(meth)acryloxypolypropoxy)phenyl]propane, tricyclodecane dimethanol di(meth)acrylate, 1 , 10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate, dipropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate base) acrylate, tripropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate; polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polytetramethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, Diethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, triethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxyethoxy)phenyl]propane, Neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate; 2-functional (meth)acrylate of ethoxylated polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxy-1,3-di(meth)acryloxypropane, etc. base) acrylate; ginseng (2-(meth)acryloxyethyl) isocyanate, ε-caprolactone modified ginseng-(2-(meth)acryloxyethyl) isocyanate, ethoxylated Glycerin Tri(meth)acrylate, Neopentylthritol Tri(meth)acrylate, Trimethylolpropane Tri(meth)acrylate, Ditrimethylolpropane Tetra(meth)acrylate, Epoxy Neopentylthritol tetra(meth)acrylate, neopentylthritol tetra(meth)acrylate, diperythritol poly(meth)acrylate, diperythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, etc. Multifunctional (meth)acrylates; Polyfunctional (meth)acrylate oligomers such as urethane (meth)acrylate oligomers, etc.

前述化合物(a2)之中,作為具有能量線硬化性基之環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基之酚樹脂,例如能夠使用在「日本特開2013-194102號公報」的段落0043等記載之物。此種樹脂亦符合後述構成熱硬化性成分之樹脂,但是在本發明作為前述化合物(a2)而處理。Among the aforementioned compounds (a2), as the epoxy resin having an energy ray curable group and the phenol resin having an energy ray curable group, for example, those described in paragraph 0043 of "JP-A-2013-194102" can be used. thing. Such a resin also corresponds to a resin constituting a thermosetting component described later, but is treated as the aforementioned compound (a2) in the present invention.

前述化合物(a2)的重量平均分子量以100~30000為佳,以300~10000為較佳。The weight average molecular weight of the aforementioned compound (a2) is preferably 100-30000, more preferably 300-10000.

含有組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之前述化合物(a2)可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The above-mentioned compound (a2) containing the composition (IV-1) and the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds. choose.

[不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)] 組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有前述化合物(a2)作為前述能量線硬化性成分(a)時,以進一步含有不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)為佳。 前述聚合物(b)其至少一部分可經交聯劑交聯,亦可不經交聯。[Polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group] When the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film contain the aforementioned compound (a2) as the aforementioned energy ray curable component (a), the polymer (b) having no energy ray curable group may be further contained. ) is preferred. At least a part of the aforementioned polymer (b) may be cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, or may not be cross-linked.

作為不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b),例如可舉出丙烯酸系聚合物、苯氧基樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚酯、橡膠系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂等。 該等之中,前述聚合物(b)以丙烯酸系聚合物(以下有略記為「丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)」之情形)為佳。Examples of the polymer (b) not having an energy-ray-curable group include acrylic polymers, phenoxy resins, urethane resins, polyesters, rubber-based resins, and acrylate urethane resins. Among them, the above-mentioned polymer (b) is preferably an acrylic polymer (hereinafter abbreviated as "acrylic polymer (b-1)").

丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)可為習知物,例如可為1種丙烯酸系單體的同元聚合物;亦可為2種以上的丙烯酸系單體之共聚物;亦可為1種或2種以上的丙烯酸系單體與1種或2種以上之丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)之共聚物。The acrylic polymer (b-1) can be a conventional one, for example, it can be a homopolymer of one acrylic monomer; it can also be a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers; it can also be one Or a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers and one or more monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers).

作為構成丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)之前述丙烯酸系單體,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯、具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。在此,所謂「取代胺基」如前面已說明。Examples of the acrylic monomers constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include alkyl (meth)acrylates, (meth)acrylates having a cyclic skeleton, and glycidyl group-containing (meth)acrylates. base) acrylates, hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates, substituted amino-containing (meth)acrylates, etc. Here, the "substituted amino group" is as described above.

作為前述(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯十二酸((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酸酯)等構成烷酯之烷基是碳數為1~18的鏈狀結構之(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯。Examples of the aforementioned alkyl (meth)acrylate include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate, base) n-butyl acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, second-butyl (meth)acrylate, third-butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate, ( Isononyl methacrylate, Decyl (meth)acrylate, Undecyl (meth)acrylate, Lauryl (meth)acrylate (Lauryl (meth)acrylate), Tridecyl (meth)acrylate ester, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmityl (meth)acrylate), (meth)acrylate Base) heptadecyl acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate ((meth)acrylic acid stearate), etc. The alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester is (meth)acrylic acid with a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms Alkyl esters.

作為前述具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯氧基烷酯等。Examples of (meth)acrylates having a cyclic skeleton include cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isobornyl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate; Aralkyl (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloenyl (meth)acrylates such as dicyclopentenyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate, such as dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc.

作為前述含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。 作為前述羥基含有(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸羥基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸酸4-羥基丁酯等。 作為前述含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸N-甲基胺基乙酯等。As said glycidyl group containing (meth)acrylate, glycidyl (meth)acrylate etc. are mentioned, for example. (Meth)acrylate containing as said hydroxyl group, for example, (meth)acrylate 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate 2-hydroxypropyl, (meth)acrylate 3 -Hydroxypropyl, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, etc. As said substituted amino group containing (meth)acrylate, N-methylamino ethyl (meth)acrylate etc. are mentioned, for example.

作為構成丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)之前述非丙烯酸系單體,例如可舉出乙烯、降莰烯等的烯烴;乙酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。Examples of the non-acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene.

作為至少一部分經交聯劑交聯之不具有前述能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b),例如可舉出前述聚合物(b)中的反應性官能基與交聯劑反應而成之物。 前述反應性官能基按照交聯劑的種類等而適當地選擇即可,沒有特別限定。例如交聯劑為聚異氰酸酯化合物時,作為前述反應性官能基,可舉出羥基、羧基、胺基等,該等之中,以與異氰酸酯基的反應性較高之羥基為佳。又,交聯劑為環氧系化合物時,作為前述反應性官能基,可舉出羧基、胺基、醯胺基等該等之中,以與環氧基反應性較高的羧基為佳。但是從防止半導體晶圓和半導體晶片的電路腐蝕的觀點而言,前述反應性官能基以羧基以外的基為佳。Examples of the polymer (b) having at least a part of the polymer (b) cross-linked by the cross-linking agent that does not have the aforementioned energy ray-curable groups include those obtained by reacting the reactive functional groups in the aforementioned polymer (b) with the cross-linking agent. . The said reactive functional group should just be suitably selected according to the kind of crosslinking agent etc., and it does not specifically limit. For example, when the crosslinking agent is a polyisocyanate compound, the reactive functional groups include hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, amino group, etc. Among them, hydroxyl group having higher reactivity with isocyanate group is preferable. Also, when the crosslinking agent is an epoxy compound, examples of the reactive functional group include carboxyl group, amine group, amido group and the like, and carboxyl group having higher reactivity with epoxy group is preferable. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of the semiconductor wafer and the circuit of the semiconductor wafer, the reactive functional group is preferably a group other than a carboxyl group.

作為具有前述反應性官能基且不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b),例如可舉出使至少具有前述反應性官能基之具有單體聚合而得到之物。丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)的情況時,使用具有前述反應性官能基之物作為已舉出作為構成該丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)的單體之前述丙烯酸系單體及非丙烯酸系單體的任一方或雙方即可。作為具有羥基作為反應性官能基之前述聚合物(b),例如可舉出使含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯聚合而得到之物,此外,亦可舉出在前面已舉出的前述丙烯酸系單體或非丙烯酸系單體,使1個或2個以上的氫原子經前述反應性官能基取代而成之單體聚合而得到之物。As a polymer (b) which has the said reactive functional group and does not have an energy-ray curable group, the thing obtained by polymerizing the monomer which has the said reactive functional group at least is mentioned, for example. In the case of the acrylic polymer (b-1), use a substance having the aforementioned reactive functional group as the aforementioned acrylic monomer and non-acrylic acid monomers listed as monomers constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1). Either or both of the monomers can be used. Examples of the polymer (b) having a hydroxyl group as a reactive functional group include those obtained by polymerizing a hydroxyl group-containing (meth)acrylate, and the above-mentioned acrylic acid. A monomer or a non-acrylic monomer obtained by polymerizing a monomer in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted by the aforementioned reactive functional groups.

在具有反應性官能基之前述聚合物(b),相對於構成該聚合物(b)之結構單元的總量,從具有反應性官能基之單體所衍生的結構單元之量的比例(含量),以1~20質量%為佳,以2~10質量%為較佳。藉由前述比例為此種範圍,在前述聚合物(b)之交聯程度成為較佳範圍。In the aforementioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group, relative to the total amount of structural units constituting the polymer (b), the ratio (content ), preferably 1-20% by mass, more preferably 2-10% by mass. When the aforementioned ratio is in such a range, the degree of crosslinking of the aforementioned polymer (b) becomes a preferable range.

就組合物(IV-1)的造膜性變為更良好之觀點而言,不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)的重量平均分子量(Mw),以10000~2000000為佳,以100000~1500000為較佳。在此,所謂「重量平均分子量」,如前面已說明。From the standpoint of better film-forming properties of the composition (IV-1), the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (b) not having an energy ray-curable group is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000. 100000~1500000 is better. Here, the "weight average molecular weight" is as described above.

組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有之不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be one type or two or more types. These combinations and ratios can be selected arbitrarily.

作為組合物(IV-1),可舉出含有前述聚合物(a1)及前述化合物(a2)的任一方或雙方之物。而且,組合物(IV-1)含有前述化合物(a2)時,以進一步含有不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)為佳,此時,進一步含有前述(a1)亦佳。又,組合物(IV-1)亦可不含有前述化合物(a2),而同時含有前述聚合物(a1)、及不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)。As a composition (IV-1), what contains either one or both of said polymer (a1) and said compound (a2) is mentioned. Furthermore, when the composition (IV-1) contains the aforementioned compound (a2), it is preferable to further include the polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group, and in this case, it is also preferable to further include the aforementioned (a1). In addition, the composition (IV-1) may contain the above-mentioned polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group at the same time without containing the aforementioned compound (a2).

組合物(IV-1)含有前述聚合物(a1)、前述化合物(a2)及不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)時,在組合物(IV-1),前述化合物(a2)的含量相對於前述聚合物(a1)及不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)的總含量100質量份,以10~400質量份為佳,以30~350質量份為較佳。When the composition (IV-1) contains the aforementioned polymer (a1), the aforementioned compound (a2) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray curable group, in the composition (IV-1), the aforementioned compound (a2) The content is preferably 10-400 parts by mass, more preferably 30-350 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total content of the polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) not having an energy-ray-curable group.

在組合物(IV-1),相對於溶劑以外的成分之總含量,前述能量線硬化性成分(a)及不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)的合計含量比例(亦即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的前述能量線硬化性成分(a)及不具有能量線硬化性基之聚合物(b)的合計含量)以5~90質量%為佳,以10~80質量%為較佳,以20~70質量%為特佳。藉由能量線硬化性成分含量之前述比例為此種範圍,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的能量線硬化性變為更良好。In composition (IV-1), with respect to the total content of components other than the solvent, the total content ratio of the aforementioned energy ray curable component (a) and polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group (that is, The total content of the energy ray curable component (a) and the polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group) of the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, and 10 to 80% by mass. The mass % is more preferable, and 20-70 mass % is especially preferable. When the ratio of the content of the energy ray curable component is in such a range, the energy ray curability of the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film becomes more favorable.

組合物(IV-1)除了前述能量線硬化性成分以外,亦可按照目的而含有選自由熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑所組成群組之1種或2種以上。Composition (IV-1) may contain, in addition to the aforementioned energy ray curable components, a thermosetting component selected from a filler, a coupling agent, a crosslinking agent, a photopolymerization initiator, a colorant, and a general-purpose One or two or more of the group consisting of additives.

例如藉由使用含有前述能量線硬化性成分及熱硬化性成分之組合物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,藉由加熱而對被接著物之接著力提升,且由該能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所形成的保護膜之強度亦提升。 又,藉由使用含有前述能量線硬化性成分及著色劑之組合物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜顯現與前面已說明的熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)時同樣的效果。For example, by using the composition (IV-1) containing the aforementioned energy ray curable component and thermosetting component, the formed thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film has improved adhesive force to the adherend by heating , and the strength of the protective film formed from the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film is also improved. Also, by using the composition (IV-1) containing the aforementioned energy ray curable component and coloring agent, the formed film for forming an energy ray curable protective film exhibits the same color as the film for forming a thermosetting protective film described above. The same effect is obtained when the coloring agent (I) is contained.

作為在組合物(IV-1)之前述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,各自可舉出與在組合物(III-1)之熱硬化性成分(B)、填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、光聚合起始劑(H)、著色劑(I)及泛用添加劑(J)的相同物。As the above-mentioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general-purpose additives in the composition (IV-1), there can be mentioned the same as those in the composition (III-1). 1) Thermosetting component (B), filler (D), coupling agent (E), crosslinking agent (F), photopolymerization initiator (H), colorant (I) and general-purpose additive (J ) the same thing.

在組合物(IV-1),前述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑各自可單獨使用1種,亦可併用2種以上,併用2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。In the composition (IV-1), each of the aforementioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants, and general-purpose additives may be used alone or in combination of two or more , and when two or more of them are used in combination, the combination and ratio of these can be arbitrarily selected.

在組合物(IV-1)之前述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑的含量按照目的而適當地調節即可,而沒有特別限定。The contents of the aforementioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general-purpose additives in the composition (IV-1) can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose, and there is no special limited.

由於組合物(IV-1)因稀釋而操作性提升,以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 作為組合物(IV-1)含有的溶劑,例如可舉出與在上述組合物(III-1)之溶劑相同物。 組合物(IV-1)含有的溶劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上。Since the composition (IV-1) improves workability by dilution, it is preferable to further contain a solvent. Examples of the solvent contained in the composition (IV-1) include the same solvents as those in the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent contained in composition (IV-1) may be only 1 type, or may be 2 or more types.

>>能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(IV-1)等的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,能夠藉由調配用以構成該組合物之各成分而得到。 在調配各成分時之添加順序沒有特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一種調配成分混合,藉由將該調配成分預先稀釋而使用,亦可不將溶劑以外的任一種調配成分預先稀釋,藉由將溶劑與該等調配成分進行混合而使用。 調配時混合各成分之方法沒有特別限定,從使攪拌子或攪拌葉等旋轉而混合之方法;使用混合機而混合之方法;及施加超音波而混合之方法等習知的方法適當地選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時之溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不劣化,就沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可,溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Production method of energy ray curable protective film forming composition>> Compositions for forming an energy ray curable protective film such as the composition (IV-1) can be obtained by preparing each component for constituting the composition. The order of addition of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added at the same time. When using a solvent, the solvent may be mixed with any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent and used by diluting the prepared ingredients in advance, or may be used without pre-diluting any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent, and the solvent may be mixed with the prepared ingredients Mixed and used. There is no particular limitation on the method of mixing the ingredients during preparation, and it can be appropriately selected from known methods such as a method of mixing by rotating a stirring bar or a stirring blade, a method of mixing by using a mixer, and a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Can. The temperature and time of adding and mixing each component are not particularly limited as long as the ingredients are not degraded, and can be adjusted appropriately. The temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

○非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 前述非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜不顯示因硬化的特性變化,在本發明,在被貼附在半導體晶圓的前述背面等做為目標之部位之階段視為形成有保護膜。○Films for forming non-hardening protective films The non-curable protective film-forming thin film does not show characteristic changes due to curing, and in the present invention, it is considered that a protective film is formed at the stage of being attached to the target site such as the aforementioned back surface of the semiconductor wafer.

作為較佳非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,例如可舉出含有熱可塑性樹脂之物。As a preferable non-hardening protective film forming film, the thing containing a thermoplastic resin is mentioned, for example.

>非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(V-1)> 作為非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,例如可舉出含有前述熱可塑性樹脂之非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(V-1)(在本說明書,有只有略記為「組合物(V-1)」之情形)等。>Non-hardening protective film forming composition (V-1)> As a composition for forming a non-curable protective film, for example, the composition (V-1) for forming a non-curable protective film containing the aforementioned thermoplastic resin (in this specification, there are only abbreviated as "composition (V-1) 1)", etc.

[熱可塑性樹脂] 前述熱可塑性樹脂沒有特別限定。 作為前述熱可塑性樹脂,更具體地,可舉出例如與已舉出作為上述的組合物(III-1)的含有成分之丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等非硬化性的樹脂的相同物。[thermoplastic resin] The aforementioned thermoplastic resin is not particularly limited. As the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, more specifically, for example, acrylic resin, polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, The same thing as non-hardening resins such as polybutadiene and polystyrene.

組合物(V-1)及非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的前述熱可塑性樹脂,可只有1種、亦可為2種以上,2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。The aforementioned thermoplastic resins contained in the composition (V-1) and the non-curable protective film-forming film may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds. choose.

組合物(V-1),相對於溶劑以外的成分之總含量,前述熱可塑性樹脂的含量比例(亦即,非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜之前述熱可塑性樹脂的含量)以5~90質量%為佳,例如可為10~80質量%、及20~70質量%等的任一者。Composition (V-1), relative to the total content of components other than the solvent, the content ratio of the thermoplastic resin (that is, the content of the thermoplastic resin in the non-curable protective film forming film) is 5 to 90 mass % is preferable, for example, any one of 10 to 80% by mass and 20 to 70% by mass may be used.

組合物(V-1)除了前述熱可塑性樹脂以外,亦可按照目的而含有選自由填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑所組成群組之1種或2種以上。Composition (V-1) may contain, in addition to the aforementioned thermoplastic resin, one or two or more types selected from the group consisting of fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants, and general-purpose additives according to purposes.

例如藉由使用含有前述熱可塑性樹脂及著色劑之組合物(V-1),所形成的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與前面已說明的熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)時顯現同樣的效果。For example, by using the composition (V-1) containing the aforementioned thermoplastic resin and coloring agent, the formed film for forming a non-hardening protective film and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film described above contain the coloring agent (I ) has the same effect.

作為在組合物(V-1)之前述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,各自可舉出與在組合物(III-1)之填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、著色劑(I)及泛用添加劑(J)相同物。As the above-mentioned filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant and general additives in the composition (V-1), each can include the filler (D) and the coupling agent in the composition (III-1). (E), crosslinking agent (F), coloring agent (I) and general-purpose additive (J) same thing.

在組合物(V-1),前述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑各自可單獨使用1種,亦可併用2種以上,併用2種以上時,該等的組合及比率能夠任意地選擇。In the composition (V-1), each of the aforementioned fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants, and general-purpose additives may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination, and when two or more types are used in combination, the combination of these And the ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

在組合物(V-1)之前述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑的含量按照目的而適當地調節即可,而沒有特別限定。The contents of the aforementioned filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant, and general-purpose additives in the composition (V-1) may be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose, and are not particularly limited.

由於組合物(V-1)藉由稀釋而操作性提升,以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 作為組合物(V-1)含有的溶劑,例如可舉出與在上述組合物(III-1)之溶劑相同物。 組合物(V-1)含有的溶劑可為只有1種,亦可為2種以上。Since the workability of the composition (V-1) improves by dilution, it is preferable to further contain a solvent. Examples of the solvent contained in the composition (V-1) include the same solvents as those in the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent contained in the composition (V-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds.

>>非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(V-1)等的非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,能夠藉由調配用以構成該組合物之各成分而得到。 在調配各成分時之添加順序沒有特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一種調配成分混合,藉由將該調配成分預先稀釋而使用,亦可不將溶劑以外的任一種調配成分預先稀釋,藉由將溶劑與該等調配成分進行混合而使用。 調配時混合各成分之方法沒有特別限定,從使攪拌子或攪拌葉等旋轉而混合之方法;使用混合機而混合之方法;及施加超音波而混合之方法等習知的方法適當地選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時之溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不劣化,就沒有特別限定,適當地調節即可,溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Production method of non-curable protective film forming composition>> Non-curable protective film forming compositions such as composition (V-1) can be obtained by preparing each component to constitute the composition. The order of addition of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added at the same time. When using a solvent, the solvent may be mixed with any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent and used by diluting the prepared ingredients in advance, or may be used without pre-diluting any of the prepared ingredients other than the solvent, and the solvent may be mixed with the prepared ingredients Mixed and used. There is no particular limitation on the method of mixing the ingredients during preparation, and it can be appropriately selected from known methods such as a method of mixing by rotating a stirring bar or a stirring blade, a method of mixing by using a mixer, and a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Can. The temperature and time of adding and mixing each component are not particularly limited as long as the ingredients are not degraded, and can be adjusted appropriately. The temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

◎其它層 前述支撐片在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,除了基材及黏著劑層以外,亦可具備前述中間層等的其它層。 又,前述保護膜形成用複合片在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,除了基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜以外,亦可具備其它層,此時的前述其它層,可為具備支撐片之前述其它層,亦可為不與支撐片直接接觸而配置。 前述其它層能夠按照目的而任意地選擇,且其種類沒有特別限定。◎Other layers The said support sheet may be provided with other layers, such as the said intermediate|middle layer, other than a base material and an adhesive agent layer in the range which does not impair the effect of this invention. In addition, the composite sheet for forming a protective film may include other layers in addition to the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. In this case, the other layers may be The aforementioned other layers provided with the support sheet may also be arranged without directly contacting the support sheet. The aforementioned other layers can be arbitrarily selected according to purposes, and the types thereof are not particularly limited.

作為前述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,例如可舉出黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,且黏著劑層至少含有具有源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯源的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物、及交聯劑,而且在黏著劑層,相對於前述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑含量為0.3~50質量份且基材的第1面的前述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm之物。As an embodiment of the support sheet and protective film-forming composite sheet, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate source. The aforementioned acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, and in the adhesive layer, the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the aforementioned acrylic polymer, and the aforementioned The maximum height roughness (Rz) is 0.01~8μm.

作為前述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,例如可舉出,黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性且黏著劑層至少含有具有源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯源的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物、及交聯劑,而且在黏著劑層,相對於前述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑含量為0.3~50質量份,並且前述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元、及源自含羥基單體的結構單元,且基材第1面的前述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm之物。As one embodiment of the support sheet and protective film-forming composite sheet, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate source. The aforementioned acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, and in the adhesive layer, the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the aforementioned acrylic polymer, and the aforementioned acrylic polymer has an alkane A structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate with a carbon number of 4 or more, and a structural unit derived from a hydroxyl-containing monomer, and the above-mentioned maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01~ 8 μm.

作為前述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,例如可舉出黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,且黏著劑層至少含有具有源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯源的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物、及交聯劑,而且在黏著劑層,相對於前述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑含量為0.3~50質量份,並且前述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元、及源自含羥基單體的結構單元,而且在前述丙烯酸系聚合物之源自含羥基單體的結構單元的含量相對於結構單元的總量為1~35質量%,且基材的第1面的前述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm之物。As an embodiment of the support sheet and protective film-forming composite sheet, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate source. The aforementioned acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, and in the adhesive layer, the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the aforementioned acrylic polymer, and the aforementioned acrylic polymer has an alkane A structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a carbon number of 4 or more, and a structural unit derived from a hydroxyl-containing monomer, and in the structural unit derived from a hydroxyl-containing monomer of the aforementioned acrylic polymer Content is 1-35 mass % with respect to the total amount of a structural unit, and the said maximum height roughness (Rz) of the 1st surface of a base material is 0.01-8 micrometers.

作為前述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,例如可舉出黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,且黏著劑層至少含有具有源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯源的結構單元之前述丙烯酸系聚合物、及交聯劑,而且在黏著劑層,相對於前述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑含量為0.3~50質量份,並且前述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上之源自(甲基)丙烯酸烷酯的結構單元、及源自含羥基單體的結構單元,而且在前述丙烯酸系聚合物之源自含羥基單體的結構單元的含量相對於結構單元的總量為1~35質量%,並且前述交聯劑為異氰酸酯系交聯劑,且基材的第1面的前述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm之物。As an embodiment of the support sheet and protective film-forming composite sheet, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate source. The aforementioned acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, and in the adhesive layer, the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the aforementioned acrylic polymer, and the aforementioned acrylic polymer has an alkane A structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a carbon number of 4 or more, and a structural unit derived from a hydroxyl-containing monomer, and in the structural unit derived from a hydroxyl-containing monomer of the aforementioned acrylic polymer The content is 1 to 35% by mass relative to the total amount of structural units, the crosslinking agent is an isocyanate crosslinking agent, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01 to 8 μm.

◇保護膜形成用複合片製造方法 前述保護膜形成用複合片例如能夠藉由具有下列步驟之製造方法(在本說明書,有稱為「製造方法(S1)」之情形)而製造:製造將基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜依照此順序在該等的厚度方向積層而構成的積層片之步驟(在本說明書,有稱為「積層片製造步驟(1)」之情形);及將前述積層片在其厚度方向邊加壓邊保存之步驟(在本說明書,有稱為「積層片保存步驟」之情形)。 各層(基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜)的形成方法如前面已說明。 以下,針對前述製造方法(S1),各步驟都進一步詳細地說明。◇Manufacturing method of composite sheet for protective film formation The aforementioned composite sheet for forming a protective film can be produced, for example, by a production method (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "manufacturing method (S1)") having the following steps: forming a substrate, an adhesive layer, and a protective film; The step of laminating thin films in the thickness direction in this order to form a laminated sheet (in this specification, there is a case called "laminated sheet manufacturing step (1)"); The step of storing under pressure (in this manual, there is a case called "the step of storing the laminated sheet"). The formation method of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, and film for protective film formation) is as above-mentioned. Hereinafter, each step of the aforementioned manufacturing method (S1) will be further described in detail.

◎製造方法(S1) >>積層片製造步驟(1)>> 在前述積層片製造步驟(1),製造將基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜依照此順序在該等厚度方向積層而構成的積層片。 在本步驟,例如藉由將上述各層(基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜等)以成為對應位置關的方式積層,來製造具有與目標的保護膜形成用複合片相同積層結構之積層片。 又,在本說明書,所謂「積層片」只要未特別限定,就意味著具有與如上述目標的保護膜形成用複合片相同積層結構,且未進行前述積層片保存步驟之物。◎Manufacturing method (S1) >>Laminate manufacturing steps (1)>> In the aforementioned laminated sheet production step (1), a laminated sheet formed by laminating a base material, an adhesive layer, and a film for forming a protective film in this order in the thickness direction is manufactured. In this step, for example, by laminating the above-mentioned layers (substrate, adhesive layer, protective film forming film, etc.) in corresponding positions, a composite sheet having the same laminated structure as the target protective film forming composite sheet is manufactured. Laminates. In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, "laminated sheet" means a product having the same laminated structure as the protective film-forming composite sheet as described above, and without performing the aforementioned laminated sheet storage step.

例如製造支撐片時,將黏著劑層積層在基材上時,將上述黏著劑組合物塗佈在基材上且按照需要使其乾燥即可。For example, when laminating an adhesive agent on a base material in the production of a support sheet, the adhesive composition described above may be applied on the base material and dried as necessary.

另一方面,例如在基材上之積層完畢的黏著劑層上,進一步積層保護膜形成用薄膜時,藉由將保護膜形成用組合物塗佈在黏著劑層上而直接形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用薄膜以外之層,亦能夠使用用以形成該層之組合物且藉由同樣的方法,而將該層積層在黏著劑層上。如此,使用任一種組合物而形成連續2層的積層結構時,能夠在由前述組合物所形成的層上、進一步塗佈組合物而形成新的層。但是該等2層之中之後面積層的層,較佳是使用前述組合物預先形成在另外的剝離膜上,且藉由將該形成完畢的層之與前述剝離膜接觸之側為相反側的露出面,與已經形成完畢之剩下的層的露出面貼合,形成連續2層的積層結構為佳。此時,前述組合物以塗佈在剝離膜的剝離處理面為佳。剝離膜在積層結構的形成後,按照需要而除去即可。On the other hand, for example, when a film for forming a protective film is further laminated on the adhesive layer that has been laminated on the base material, the film for forming a protective film is directly formed by coating the composition for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer. film. The layer other than the film for protective film formation can also be laminated|stacked on the adhesive agent layer by the same method using the composition for forming this layer. In this way, when using any of the compositions to form a continuous two-layer laminated structure, the composition can be further coated on the layer formed of the aforementioned composition to form a new layer. However, among these two layers, it is preferable that the layer of the subsequent layer is formed in advance on another release film using the aforementioned composition, and by making the side of the formed layer that is in contact with the aforementioned release film the opposite side. The exposed surface is preferably bonded to the exposed surface of the remaining layer that has already been formed to form a laminated structure of two consecutive layers. In this case, it is preferable to coat the above-mentioned composition on the release-treated surface of the release film. The release film may be removed as necessary after formation of the laminated structure.

例如,製造將黏著劑層積層在基材上,且將保護膜形成用薄膜積層在前述黏著劑層上而成之保護膜形成用複合片(支撐片為基材與黏著劑層的積層物之保護膜形成用複合片)時,藉由將黏著劑組合物塗佈在基材上,且按照需要使其乾燥而將黏著劑層預先積層在基材上,另外藉由將保護膜形成用組合物塗佈在剝離膜上,按照需要使其乾燥而將保護膜形成用薄膜預先形成在剝離膜上。然後,將該保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面與在基材上積層完畢的黏著劑層的露出面貼合,而將保護膜形成用薄膜積層在黏著劑層上,得到前述積層片。For example, a protective film-forming composite sheet is manufactured in which an adhesive layer is laminated on a substrate, and a protective film-forming film is laminated on the adhesive layer (the support sheet is a laminate of the substrate and the adhesive layer). Composite sheet for forming a protective film), the adhesive layer is laminated on the base material in advance by applying the adhesive composition on the base material and drying it as necessary, and by applying the composition for forming a protective film The product is applied on a release film, and dried as necessary to form a protective film-forming film on a release film in advance. Then, the exposed surface of the protective film-forming film was bonded to the exposed surface of the adhesive layer laminated on the substrate, and the protective film-forming film was laminated on the adhesive layer to obtain the laminated sheet.

又,將黏著劑層積層在基材上時,如上述,亦可藉由將黏著劑組合物塗佈在剝離膜上來代替將黏著劑組合物塗佈基材上之方法,且按照需要使其乾燥,而將黏著劑層預先形成在剝離膜上,而且藉由將該層的露出面與基材的一表面貼合,而將黏著劑層積層在基材上。 任一種方法,剝離膜均是在形成目標的積層結構後的任意時間點除去即可。Also, when laminating the adhesive layer on the base material, as described above, instead of applying the adhesive composition to the base material, the method of applying the adhesive composition to the release film may be applied, and the After drying, an adhesive layer is preliminarily formed on the release film, and the exposed surface of the layer is bonded to one surface of the base material to laminate the adhesive layer on the base material. In either method, the release film may be removed at any point after formation of the target laminated structure.

如此,構成保護膜形成用複合片之基材以外的層,任一者均能夠使用預先形成在剝離膜上,且貼合在目標之層的表面之方法來積層,所以按照需要適當地選擇採用此種步驟之層來製造前述積層片即可。In this way, any layer other than the base material constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be laminated by a method of forming a release film in advance and sticking it to the surface of the target layer, so it is appropriately selected and used according to needs. Layers of such steps can be used to manufacture the aforementioned laminated sheet.

例如,保護膜形成用複合片通常以將剝離膜貼合在與支撐片為相反側的最表層(例如,保護膜形成用薄膜)的表面之狀態下保管。因而,藉由將保護膜形成用組合物等的用以形成構成最表層之層的組合物塗佈在該剝離膜(較佳是其剝離處理面)上,且按照需要使其乾燥,而將構成最表層之層預先形成在剝離膜上,而且將剩餘的各層使用上述任一種方法積層在該層之與剝離膜接觸側為相反側的露出面上,即便在設定為不除去剝離膜之貼合狀態下,亦能夠得到前述積層片。For example, the composite sheet for protective film formation is normally stored in the state which bonded the release film to the surface of the outermost layer (for example, the film for protective film formation) on the side opposite to a support sheet. Therefore, by applying a composition for forming a layer constituting the outermost layer, such as a protective film-forming composition, on the release film (preferably its release-treated surface), and drying it as necessary, the The layer constituting the outermost layer is preformed on the release film, and the remaining layers are laminated on the exposed surface of the layer opposite to the side in contact with the release film using any of the above methods. In the combined state, the aforementioned laminated sheet can also be obtained.

保護膜形成用複合片具備前述其它層時,是在上述積層片製造步驟(1)之適合的時間點,以成為適合的配置位置之方式、適當地追加設置前述其它層之步驟而進行即可。When the composite sheet for forming a protective film is equipped with the above-mentioned other layers, it may be performed by appropriately adding the above-mentioned other layers so as to obtain an appropriate arrangement position at an appropriate time point in the above-mentioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (1). .

在積層片製造步驟(1)所製造的前述積層片之形狀,沒有特別限定。例如可製造適合捲取成為捲物狀之長條積層片,亦可製造非長條之其它形狀的積層片。The shape of the laminated sheet produced in the laminated sheet manufacturing step (1) is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to manufacture a long laminated sheet suitable for winding into a roll shape, and also to manufacture a laminated sheet of other shapes than a long strip.

>>積層片保存步驟>> 在前述積層片保存步驟,是將前述積層片在其厚度方向邊加壓邊保存。 在本步驟,作為將前述積層片邊加壓邊保存之方法,例如可舉出下列等方法:將長條的前述積層片捲取成為捲物狀,且將該捲取後的積層片在原來狀態下,將藉由捲取而產生的壓力邊施加在積層片的一面或兩面邊保存之方法;及不將長條的前述積層片捲取成為捲物狀,而是對展開狀態的積層片、或非長條的前述積層片之一面或兩面邊施加壓力邊保管之方法。>>Preservation steps of laminate>> In the step of storing the laminated sheet, the laminated sheet is stored while being pressed in its thickness direction. In this step, as a method of storing the above-mentioned laminated sheet while pressing, for example, the following method can be mentioned: the elongated aforementioned laminated sheet is wound into a roll shape, and the rolled-up laminated sheet is placed in the original state. state, the method of storing the laminated sheet while applying the pressure generated by winding to one or both sides of the laminated sheet; , or non-long strip of the aforementioned laminated sheet is stored while applying pressure to one or both sides thereof.

將長條積層片捲取成為捲物狀時,積層片以在其長度方向捲取為佳。 將積層片捲取時,例如捲取張力以150~170N/m為佳,捲取速度以45~55m/min為佳,捲取張力的減低率(Taper ratio)以85~95%為佳。藉由採用此種捲取條件,能夠以較適合的壓力而加壓保存積層片。此種捲取條件例如特別適合應用在厚度為100~300μm、寬度為300~500mm、長度為40~60m的積層片,但是積層片的大小不被此限定。When the long laminated sheet is wound into a roll shape, it is preferable that the laminated sheet is wound in the longitudinal direction. When winding the laminate, for example, the winding tension is preferably 150~170N/m, the winding speed is preferably 45~55m/min, and the winding tension reduction rate (Taper ratio) is preferably 85~95%. By employing such winding conditions, the laminated sheet can be pressurized and stored at a more suitable pressure. Such winding conditions are particularly suitable for application to laminated sheets with a thickness of 100-300 μm, a width of 300-500 mm, and a length of 40-60 m, but the size of the laminated sheet is not limited thereto.

積層片例如可在常溫下或室溫下捲取,如後述,亦可將捲取的積層片在與加熱加壓保存時同樣的溫度條件下捲取。The laminated sheet can be wound up, for example, at normal temperature or at room temperature. As will be described later, the wound laminated sheet can also be wound up under the same temperature conditions as when it is stored under heat and pressure.

捲取成為捲物狀後的積層片,可在常溫下或室溫下保存,以邊加熱邊保存為佳。藉由如此地加熱加壓保存,能夠得到黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性、及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜透過支撐片之印字視認性為更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。The laminated sheet rolled into a roll can be stored at room temperature or at room temperature, preferably while being heated. By storing under heat and pressure in this way, it is possible to obtain a composite sheet for protective film formation that is more excellent in the laminarity of the adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation, and the visibility of the protective film or the film for protective film formation through the support sheet. .

將積層片捲取成為捲物狀時的保存時的加熱溫度沒有特別限定,以53~75℃為佳,以55~70℃為較佳,以57~65℃為特佳。The heating temperature at the time of storage when winding up the laminated sheet into a roll shape is not particularly limited, but is preferably 53-75°C, more preferably 55-70°C, and particularly preferably 57-65°C.

將積層片捲取成為捲物狀時的保存時間,沒有特別限定,以24~720小時(1~30天)為佳,以48~480小時(2~20天)為較佳,以72~240小時(3~10天)為特佳。The storage time when the laminated sheet is wound into a roll shape is not particularly limited, preferably 24-720 hours (1-30 days), preferably 48-480 hours (2-20 days), and 72-720 hours. 240 hours (3~10 days) is the best.

捲取成為捲物狀之積層片,例如將保護膜形成用薄膜及支撐片加工為特定形狀,如此被加工後的支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜之複數片的積層物,亦可為在該等保護膜形成用薄膜側被貼合在長條剝離膜之同時、在該剝離膜的長度方向排列而配置之物。此時的保護膜形成用薄膜以具有與半導體晶圓相同或大致相同的平面形狀(通常為圓形狀)為佳。又,此時的支撐片,以具有與切割裝置中用以固定支撐片之治具具有相同或大致相同的外周形狀為佳。又,此時,剝離膜之前述積層物的貼合面之中,在短方向的周緣部附近以不重疊在前述積層物之方式配置有帶狀的薄片為佳。該薄片是在將積層片捲取成為捲物狀時,用以抑制在前述積層物表面產生之段差(在本說明書,有稱為「積層痕跡」之情形)之物。前述積層痕跡是由於在積層片的捲物中,前述積層物(經加工的支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜之積層物)的積層位置在捲物的徑向不一致,致使前述積層物表面承受較高的壓力而產生。將前述薄片設置在前述周緣部附近時,在前述積層物表面不會承受此種較高的壓力,且能夠抑制產生前述積層痕跡。A laminated sheet wound into a roll, for example, a film for forming a protective film and a support sheet are processed into a specific shape, and a laminate of multiple sheets of the support sheet and film for forming a protective film thus processed can also be used in the The film side for protective film formation, etc. are bonded to the elongate release film, and it arrange|positions in the longitudinal direction of this release film. In this case, the thin film for forming a protective film preferably has the same or substantially the same planar shape (usually circular shape) as that of the semiconductor wafer. Also, at this time, the support sheet preferably has the same or substantially the same outer peripheral shape as the jig used to fix the support sheet in the cutting device. In addition, at this time, it is preferable that a belt-shaped sheet is arranged near the peripheral portion in the short direction of the laminated product of the release film so as not to overlap the laminated product. This sheet is used to suppress the level difference (in this specification, there is a case called "lamination marks") that occurs on the surface of the laminate when the laminate sheet is wound into a roll. The above-mentioned lamination traces are due to the fact that in the roll of the laminate sheet, the lamination position of the above-mentioned laminate (the laminate of the processed support sheet and the film for protective film formation) is not consistent in the radial direction of the roll, causing the surface of the above-mentioned laminate to bear more produced by high pressure. When the sheet is placed in the vicinity of the peripheral portion, such a high pressure is not applied to the surface of the layered product, and the generation of the layered layer marks can be suppressed.

不將長條積層片捲取成為捲物狀而設為展開的狀態時,及積層片為非長條時,以將複數片該等積層片進一步積層而保存為佳。而且,如此地將積層片進行積層時,以使複數片該等積層片的方向及周緣部的位置成為互相一致的狀態為佳。When the elongated laminated sheet is not rolled into a roll but is in an unfolded state, and when the laminated sheet is not long, it is preferable to store a plurality of such laminated sheets by further laminating them. Furthermore, when the laminated sheets are laminated in this way, it is preferable that the directions of the laminated sheets and the positions of the peripheral portions of the plurality of laminated sheets coincide with each other.

非長條的積層片(換言之,單片積層片)的形狀及大小沒有特別限定。例如,能夠使用切割裝置,以適合於1片半導體晶圓進行加工之方式,配合半導體晶圓的形狀及大小、以及切割裝置中的用以將支撐片固定之治具形狀及大小,調節積層片形狀及大小為佳。The shape and size of the non-long laminated sheet (in other words, single laminated sheet) are not particularly limited. For example, a dicing device can be used to process a single semiconductor wafer, and the laminated sheet can be adjusted according to the shape and size of the semiconductor wafer and the shape and size of the jig for fixing the support sheet in the dicing device. Good shape and size.

積層後的狀態之前述積層片,亦可在常溫下或室溫下保存,但是以邊加熱邊保存為佳。如此,藉由加熱加壓保存,能夠使用黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性,以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的透過支撐片之印字視認性為更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。 而且將積層後的狀態之前述積層片進行加壓保存時的加熱溫度及保存時間,任一者均能夠設為與上述將積層片捲取成為捲物狀時同樣。The above-mentioned laminated sheet in the laminated state can also be stored at normal temperature or at room temperature, but it is better to store it while heating. In this way, by storing under heat and pressure, it is possible to use a composite for forming a protective film that is more excellent in the laminarity of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the visibility of the printed characters through the support sheet of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film. piece. Furthermore, both the heating temperature and the storage time when storing the laminated sheet in a laminated state under pressure can be the same as when the laminated sheet is wound into a roll shape as described above.

在製造方法(S1),積層片保存步驟結束後,能夠藉由將積層片的加壓、及按照需要之加熱解除而得到目標的保護膜形成用複合片。In the production method (S1), after the laminated sheet storage step is completed, the target composite sheet for protective film formation can be obtained by releasing the pressure of the laminated sheet and, if necessary, heating.

在製造方法(S1)的積層片製造步驟(1),基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的積層(貼合)順序沒有特別限定,預先製造支撐片(預先將黏著劑層積層基材上),另外預先製造保護膜形成用薄膜且將保護膜形成用薄膜積層在支撐片上時,亦可將支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的任一方或雙方,單獨或在將該等積層之前,使用與上述積層片時的相同方法進行加壓保存。藉由將積層前的支撐片單獨加壓保存,能夠更有效地抑制在基材與黏著劑層之間產生前述非貼合區域。又,藉由將積層前的保護膜形成用薄膜單獨加壓保存,保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜之黏著劑層側的面(第2面)的凹凸度變為較小(平滑度較大),保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜的設計性提升。In the laminated sheet manufacturing step (1) of the manufacturing method (S1), the order of lamination (bonding) of the base material, the adhesive layer, and the protective film forming film is not particularly limited, and the support sheet is prepared in advance (preliminarily laminating the adhesive layer material), and when the film for forming a protective film is manufactured in advance and the film for forming a protective film is laminated on a support sheet, either or both of the film for forming a support sheet and the film for forming a protective film may be used alone or before lamination of these , Preserve under pressure using the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned laminated sheet. By separately storing the support sheet before lamination under pressure, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of the aforementioned non-adhesive region between the base material and the adhesive layer. In addition, by storing the film for protective film formation before lamination alone under pressure, the unevenness of the film for protective film formation and the surface (second surface) on the side of the adhesive layer of the protective film becomes smaller (the smoothness is larger). ), the film for protective film formation and the design improvement of the protective film.

亦即,前述保護膜形成用複合片,例如亦能夠藉由具有下列步驟之製造方法(在本說明書,有稱為「製造方法(S2)」之情形)而製造:藉由將保護膜形成用薄膜積層在積層有基材及黏著劑層之支撐片的前述黏著劑層上,而製造基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜依照此順序在該等厚度方向積層而成的構成之積層片之步驟(在本說明書,有稱為「積層片製造步驟(2)」之情形);及將前述積層片在其厚度方向邊加壓邊保存之步驟(保存步驟);而且進一步將在前述積層片製造步驟(2)之前(亦即,將前述支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜積層之前),將前述支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的任一方或雙方、各自在其厚度方向邊加壓邊保存之步驟(在本說明書,有將保存支撐片之步驟稱為「支撐片保存步驟」,將保存保護膜形成用薄膜之步驟稱為「保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟」之情形)。That is, the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film can also be produced, for example, by a production method (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "manufacturing method (S2)") having the following steps: The film is laminated on the above-mentioned adhesive layer of the support sheet on which the substrate and the adhesive layer are laminated, and the laminated layer of the composition is formed by laminating the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming the protective film in this order in the thickness direction (in this specification, there is a case called "laminated sheet manufacturing step (2)"); and the step of storing the aforementioned laminated sheet while pressing in its thickness direction (preservation step); and further described in the aforementioned Before the laminated sheet production step (2) (i.e., before laminating the aforementioned support sheet and protective film-forming film), either or both of the aforementioned support sheet and protective film-forming film are pressurized in the thickness direction thereof. Steps of side preservation (in this specification, the step of preserving the support sheet may be referred to as the "support sheet preservation step", and the step of preserving the protective film forming film may be referred to as the "protective film forming film preservation step").

◎製造方法(S2) 前述製造方法(S2)進行積層片製造步驟(2)作為上述積層片製造步驟(1),除了進一步追加進行前述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟的任一方或雙方而之點以外,與上述製造方法(S1)相同。◎Manufacturing method (S2) The aforementioned manufacturing method (S2) performs the laminated sheet manufacturing step (2) as the aforementioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (1), except that either or both of the aforementioned support sheet storage step and protective film forming film storage step are additionally performed. , the same as the above-mentioned manufacturing method (S1).

>>積層片製造步驟(2)>> 前述積層片製造步驟(2)如上述,預先製造支撐片,另外預先製造保護膜形成用薄膜,且將保護膜形成用薄膜積層在支撐片上之方式,除了限定各層的積層順序之點以外,與在製造方法(S1)之積層片製造步驟(1)相同。>>Laminate manufacturing steps (2)>> The aforementioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (2) is as described above. The method of manufacturing the support sheet in advance, and manufacturing the film for forming the protective film in advance, and laminating the film for forming the protective film on the support sheet is the same as The same is true for the laminated sheet manufacturing step (1) of the manufacturing method (S1).

>>支撐片保存步驟、保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟>> 前述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟,除了各自的保存對象物為非積層片,而為支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜之點以外,能夠與在製造方法(S1)之積層片保存步驟同樣地進行。 此時,例如支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間,可與積層片時同樣地,各自獨立地為24~720小時(1~30天)、48~480小時(2~20天)、及72~240小時(3~10天)之任一者。>>Support Sheet Preservation Procedure, Protective Film Formation Film Preservation Procedure>> The aforementioned support sheet storage step and protective film formation film storage step can be compared with the laminated sheet in the production method (S1) except that the object of preservation is a non-laminated sheet but a support sheet or a film for protective film formation. The saving procedure is performed in the same manner. At this time, for example, the storage time of the support sheet and the protective film forming film can be independently 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days), 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days), and And any one of 72~240 hours (3~10 days).

另一方面,前述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟,各自如上述地變更保存對象物且變更保存對象物(支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜)的保存時間,除了該等變更點以外,可與在製造方法(S1)之積層片保存步驟同樣地進行。 此時,例如支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間各自獨立地可為12~720小時(0.5~30天)、12~480小時(0.5~20天)、及12~240小時(0.5~10天)之任一者。但是這是前述保存時間的一個例子。 實施例On the other hand, in the support sheet storage step and protective film formation film storage step, each of the storage objects is changed as described above and the storage time of the storage objects (support sheet or protective film formation film) is changed, except for these changes. Other than that, it can be carried out in the same manner as in the step of storing the laminated sheet in the manufacturing method (S1). At this time, for example, the storage time of the support sheet and the protective film forming film can be independently 12 to 720 hours (0.5 to 30 days), 12 to 480 hours (0.5 to 20 days), and 12 to 240 hours (0.5 to 20 days). 10 days). But this is an example of the aforementioned save time. Example

以下,藉由具體的實施例,而更詳細地說明本發明。但是本發明不被以下顯示之實施例限定。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail by specific examples. However, the present invention is not limited by the Examples shown below.

>保護膜形成用組合物的製造原料> 將保護膜形成用組合物的製造所使用的原料顯示在以下。 ‧聚合物成分(A) (A)-1:使丙烯酸甲酯(85質量份)及丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(15質量份)共聚合而成之丙烯酸系聚合物(重量平均分子量370000、玻璃轉移溫度6℃) ‧熱硬化性成分(B1) (B1)-1:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER828」、環氧當量184~194g/eq) (B1)-2:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER1055」、環氧當量800~900g/eq) (B1)-3:二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂(DIC公司製「Epiclon HP-7200HH」、環氧當量255~260g/eq) ‧熱硬化性成分(B2) (B2)-1:二氰二胺(ADEKA製「ADEKA HARDENER EH-3636AS」、熱活性潛在性環氧樹脂硬化劑、活性氫量21g/eq) ‧硬化促進劑(C) (C)-1:2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑(四國化成工業公司製「CUREZOLE 2PHZ-PW」) ‧填充劑(D) (D)-1:氧化矽填料(ADMATECHS公司製SC2050MA」、經環氧系化合物表面修飾之氧化矽填料、平均粒徑0.5μm) ‧偶合劑(E) (E)-1:3-胺丙基三甲氧基矽烷(NUC公司製「A-1110」) ‧著色劑(I) (I)-1:黑色顏料(大日精化公司製)>Raw materials for the production of protective film-forming compositions> The raw materials used for manufacture of the composition for protective film formation are shown below. ‧Polymer component (A) (A)-1: Acrylic polymer obtained by copolymerizing methyl acrylate (85 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (15 parts by mass) (weight average molecular weight 370000, glass transition temperature 6°C) ‧Thermosetting components (B1) (B1)-1: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER828" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 184~194g/eq) (B1)-2: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER1055" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 800~900g/eq) (B1)-3: Dicyclopentadiene-type epoxy resin ("Epiclon HP-7200HH" manufactured by DIC Corporation, epoxy equivalent 255~260g/eq) ‧Thermosetting components (B2) (B2)-1: Dicyandiamide ("ADEKA HARDENER EH-3636AS" manufactured by ADEKA, thermally active latent epoxy resin hardener, active hydrogen content 21g/eq) ‧Hardening Accelerator (C) (C)-1: 2-Phenyl-4,5-Dihydroxymethylimidazole ("CUREZOLE 2PHZ-PW" manufactured by Shikoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ‧Filler (D) (D)-1: Silicon oxide filler (SC2050MA manufactured by ADMATECHS Co., Ltd., silicon oxide filler surface-modified with epoxy compounds, average particle size 0.5 μm) ‧Coupling agent (E) (E)-1: 3-Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane ("A-1110" manufactured by NUC Corporation) ‧Coloring agent (I) (I)-1: Black pigment (made by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd.)

[實施例1] >支撐片的製造> (黏著劑組合物(I-4)的製造) 製造含有丙烯酸系聚合物(100質量份、固體成分)、及3官能二甲苯撐基二異氰酸酯系交聯劑(三井武田CHEMICAL公司製「TAKENATE D110N」)(40質量份(固體成分)),而且含有作為溶劑之甲基乙基酮、甲苯及乙酸乙酯的混合溶劑之固體成分濃度為30質量%的非能量線硬化性黏著劑組合物(I-4)。前述丙烯酸系聚合物是使丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)(80質量份)、及丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯(HEA)(20質量份)共聚合而成之重量平均分子量為800000的預共聚物。[Example 1] >Manufacture of support sheet> (Manufacture of Adhesive Composition (I-4)) An acrylic polymer (100 parts by mass, solid content) and a trifunctional xylylene diisocyanate crosslinking agent ("TAKENATE D110N" manufactured by Mitsui Takeda Chemical Co., Ltd.) (40 parts by mass (solid content)) were produced, and A non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition (I-4) having a solid content concentration of 30% by mass of a mixed solvent containing methyl ethyl ketone, toluene, and ethyl acetate as a solvent. The aforesaid acrylic polymer is a prepolymer with a weight average molecular weight of 800,000 obtained by copolymerizing 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) (80 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) (20 parts by mass). copolymer.

(支撐片的製造) 使用藉由聚矽氧處理對聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製薄膜的一面進行剝離處理後之剝離膜(LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm),將上述所得到的黏著劑組合物(I-4)塗佈在其前述剝離處理面,藉由於120℃加熱2分鐘使其乾燥來形成非能量線硬化性黏著劑層。此時,以黏著劑層的厚度為4μm之方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)。(manufacture of support sheet) Using a release film ("SP-PET381031" manufactured by LINTEC Co., Ltd., thickness 38 μm) after peeling one side of a polyethylene terephthalate film by silicone treatment, the adhesive composition obtained above (I-4) Apply on the peeling-treated surface, and heat at 120° C. for 2 minutes to dry to form a non-energy ray-curable adhesive layer. At this time, conditions were set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer would be 4 μm, and the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied.

將聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)夾入至具有凹凸面之金屬輥與具有平滑面之金屬輥,藉由將金屬輥的凹凸面於60℃邊加熱邊使其旋轉而按壓在聚丙烯製薄膜之一表面,來製造一面為凹凸面且另一面為平滑面(光澤面)之基材。針對該基材的凹凸面,與黏著劑層的R值同樣地測定基材的R值時為1.8μm。A polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm) is sandwiched between a metal roll with a concave-convex surface and a metal roll with a smooth surface, and the concave-convex surface of the metal roll is heated at 60°C and rotated to press. On one surface of a polypropylene film, a base material with one side being uneven and the other side being smooth (glossy) is produced. When the R value of the base material was measured similarly to the R value of the adhesive layer about the uneven surface of this base material, it was 1.8 micrometers.

其次,藉由將前述基材的凹凸面貼合在上述所得到的黏著劑層之露出面,而得到基材、黏著劑層及剝離膜、依照此順序積層在該等厚度方向而構成之支撐片。所得到的支撐片的寬度(換言之、基材及黏著劑層的寬度)為400mm,長度為250m。 如以上進行而得到本發明的支撐片。Next, by attaching the concave-convex surface of the aforementioned base material to the exposed surface of the adhesive layer obtained above, a base material, an adhesive layer, and a release film are laminated in this order in the thickness direction to form a support. piece. The width of the obtained support sheet (in other words, the width of the base material and the adhesive layer) was 400 mm, and the length was 250 m. The support sheet of this invention was obtained as mentioned above.

其次,針對該支撐片,立刻進行有關後述基材與黏著劑層之間的非貼合區域之評價。又,將該支撐片在其狀態下直接使用於製造後述之保護膜形成用複合片。Next, with respect to this support sheet, the evaluation regarding the non-bonding area between the base material and the adhesive layer mentioned later was performed immediately. Moreover, this support sheet was used as it is for manufacture of the composite sheet for protective film formation mentioned later as it is.

>保護膜形成用複合片的製造> (保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)的製造) 使聚合物成分(A)-1(150質量份)、熱硬化性成分(B1)-1(60質量份)、(B1)-2(10質量份)、(B1)-3(30質量份)、(B2)-1(2質量份)、硬化促進劑(C)-1(2質量份)、填充劑(D)-1(320質量份)、偶合劑(E)-1(2質量份)、及著色劑(I)-1(18質量份)溶解或分散在甲基乙基酮、甲苯及乙酸乙酯的混合溶劑,藉由於23℃攪拌而得到固體成分濃度為51質量%之熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)。又,在此顯示之調配量全部為固體成分量。>Manufacture of composite sheet for protective film formation> (Manufacture of protective film forming composition (III-1)) Make polymer component (A)-1 (150 mass parts), thermosetting component (B1)-1 (60 mass parts), (B1)-2 (10 mass parts), (B1)-3 (30 mass parts ), (B2)-1 (2 mass parts), hardening accelerator (C)-1 (2 mass parts), filler (D)-1 (320 mass parts), coupling agent (E)-1 (2 mass parts parts), and coloring agent (I)-1 (18 parts by mass) were dissolved or dispersed in a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate, and a solid content concentration of 51% by mass was obtained by stirring at 23°C. Thermosetting protective film forming composition (III-1). In addition, all the compounding quantities shown here are solid content quantities.

(保護膜形成用薄膜的製造) 將上述所得到的保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)使用刮刀塗佈器塗佈在聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製膜的一面經聚矽氧處理之經剝離處理的剝離膜(第2剝離膜、LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm)之前述剝離處理面,藉由於100℃使其乾燥2分鐘而製造厚度25μm的熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜。(Manufacture of film for protective film formation) The above-obtained composition for forming a protective film (III-1) was coated with a doctor blade coater on a release film treated with silicone on one side of a polyethylene terephthalate film (No. 2 Release film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec Co., Ltd., thickness 38 μm) The aforementioned release treatment surface was dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to produce a film for forming a thermosetting protective film with a thickness of 25 μm.

而且,藉由將剝離膜(第1剝離膜、LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm)的剝離處理面貼合在所得到的保護膜形成用薄膜之不具備第2剝離膜之側的露出面,而得到在保護膜形成用薄膜的一面具備第1剝離膜且在另一面具備第2剝離膜之積層膜。所得到的積層膜的寬度(換言之、保護膜形成用薄膜、第1剝離膜及第2剝離膜的寬度)為400mm。Then, by attaching the release-treated surface of the release film (the first release film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by LINTEC Corporation, thickness 38 μm) to the side of the obtained film for forming a protective film that does not have the second release film, The exposed surface was obtained to obtain a laminated film having a first release film on one surface of the film for forming a protective film and a second release film on the other surface. The width of the obtained laminated film (in other words, the width of the film for protective film formation, the 1st release film, and the 2nd release film) was 400 mm.

(保護膜形成用複合片製造) 準備直徑為5cm且其中從表面起至3mm為止的深度之區域由硬度50度的耐熱性聚矽氧橡膠所構成之1組(2支)之輥筒。 將剝離膜從上述所得到的支撐片黏著劑層除去。又,將第1剝離膜從上述所得到的積層膜除去。 接著,使除去上述剝離膜而產生的黏著劑層之露出面、與除去上述第1剝離膜而產生的保護膜形成用薄膜之露出面相向,將該等支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜疊合而成為積層物之同時,藉由將該積層物以0.3m/min的速度、通過溫度設定在60℃之該等輥筒之間的間隙,在0.5MPa的壓力下進行加熱按壓(加熱貼合)。藉此,製造基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及第2剝離膜、依照此順序在該等厚度方向積層而構成之具有與目標的保護膜形成用複合片相同積層結構之積層片(保存前的保護膜形成用複合片)。 在所得到的前述積層片,其寬度(換言之,支撐片的寬度)為400mm。(Manufacture of composite sheets for protective film formation) One set (two pieces) of rollers having a diameter of 5 cm and a region from the surface to a depth of 3 mm made of heat-resistant silicone rubber with a hardness of 50 degrees was prepared. The release film was removed from the support sheet adhesive layer obtained above. Also, the first release film was removed from the laminated film obtained above. Next, the exposed surface of the adhesive layer produced by removing the above-mentioned release film and the exposed surface of the protective film-forming film produced by removing the above-mentioned first release film face each other, and these support sheets and the protective film-forming film are laminated. While becoming a laminate, the laminate is heated and pressed under a pressure of 0.5 MPa by passing the laminate at a speed of 0.3 m/min through the gap between the rollers whose temperature is set at 60°C (heat bonding ). In this way, a laminated sheet having the same laminated structure as the target protective film forming composite sheet is produced by laminating the base material, the adhesive layer, the protective film forming film, and the second release film in the thickness direction in this order. (Composite sheet for protective film formation before storage). The obtained laminated sheet had a width (in other words, the width of the supporting sheet) of 400 mm.

其次,將上述所得到之全體大小為400mm×250m的積層片,將其長度方向作為捲取方向且在捲取張力160N/m、捲取速度50m/min、捲取張力的減低率90%之條件下,纏繞ABS樹脂的芯材且捲取成為捲物狀。此時,在捲物的徑向使基材朝向外側(換言之、使第2剝離膜接觸芯材)而將積層片捲取。 其次,將該捲物狀積層片,在空氣環境且60℃的溫度條件下靜置保存7天(168小時)。 如以上進行而得到具有第2圖顯示的構造之本發明的保護膜形成用複合片。Next, take the laminated sheet obtained above with an overall size of 400mm x 250m, take its longitudinal direction as the take-up direction, and set a take-up tension of 160N/m, a take-up speed of 50m/min, and a take-up tension reduction rate of 90%. Under the condition, the core material of ABS resin is wound and coiled into a roll shape. At this time, the laminated sheet was wound up with the base material facing outward in the radial direction of the roll (in other words, the second release film was brought into contact with the core material). Next, this roll-shaped laminated sheet was left to stand for 7 days (168 hours) under the temperature conditions of 60° C. in an air environment. As above, the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention which has the structure shown in FIG. 2 is obtained.

其次,結束在此種加熱加壓條件下的保存之後,針對本發明的保護膜形成用複合片進行評價以下顯示之項目。Next, after finishing storage under such heating and pressurizing conditions, the following items were evaluated about the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention.

>支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片評價> (黏著劑層的R值之測定) 從上述所得到的保護膜形成用複合片5處、切取大小為3mm×3mnm的試驗片。該5處切取位置設為圓形狀的保護膜形成用薄膜之中,相當於中心部1處,及靠近周緣部的部位且對該中心部相當於大致點對稱的位置4處。該等5處的切取位置之中,相當於中心部之1處與此外的靠近周緣部的部位4處之中心間距離為100mm。>Evaluation of support sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation> (Measurement of R value of adhesive layer) A test piece having a size of 3 mm×3 mm was cut out from five composite sheets for forming a protective film obtained above. Among the circular film for forming a protective film, the five cutting positions corresponded to one center portion, and four positions corresponded to approximately point-symmetrical positions near the peripheral portion with respect to the center portion. Among these 5 cutting positions, the distance between the center of one position corresponding to the central part and the other 4 positions close to the peripheral part was 100 mm.

使用剖面試料製造裝置(JEOL公司製「CROSS SECTION POLISHER-SM-09010」),將間歇開閉器的條件設為「in」10秒,將「out」設為5秒,將離子源的電壓設為3kV,將總研磨時間設為24小時,從前述試驗片形成其剖面。新形成剖面設為每1片試驗片只有1面。Using a cross-sectional material manufacturing device ("CROSS SECTION POLISHER-SM-09010" manufactured by JEOL Corporation), set the condition of the intermittent switch to "in" for 10 seconds, "out" to 5 seconds, and the voltage of the ion source to 3 kV, the total polishing time was set to 24 hours, and the cross section was formed from the aforementioned test piece. The newly formed cross section was set to have only one side per one test piece.

使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察該等5個試驗片新形成的剖面,各試驗片都是求取黏著劑層之(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向的直線距離)之比。此時試驗片剖面的觀察區域設為在前述剖面的寬度方向之1mm的區域。 而且,將該等比的平均值採用作為黏著劑層的R值。將結果顯示在表1。 又,基材的R值之測定方法及求取方法亦與黏著劑層的R值之測定方法及求取方法相同。Using a scanning electron microscope (SEM), observe the newly formed cross-sections of these five test pieces. For each test piece, the (sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(total of the adhesive layer The agent layer is the ratio of the linear distance in the horizontal direction). At this time, the observation area of the cross section of the test piece was set to a region of 1 mm in the width direction of the cross section. And, the average value of this ratio was adopted as the R value of the adhesive layer. The results are shown in Table 1. Also, the method of measuring and obtaining the R value of the substrate is the same as the method of measuring and obtaining the R value of the adhesive layer.

(保護膜的印字視認性的評價) 從上述所得到的保護膜形成用複合片,將第2剝離膜除去,將藉此所產生的保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面(與黏著劑層側為相反側的面)貼附在8英吋的半導體晶圓背面。此時的貼附,使用膠帶貼合機(Tape mounter)(LINTEC公司製「RAD2700」)而進行。 藉此,製造基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及半導體晶圓依照此順序在該等厚度方向積層而構成之第1積層結構體。(Evaluation of print visibility of protective film) From the composite sheet for forming a protective film obtained above, the second release film was removed, and the exposed surface (the surface opposite to the adhesive layer side) of the film for forming a protective film thus produced was attached to an 8-inch inch semiconductor wafer backside. The attachment at this time was performed using a tape mounter ("RAD2700" manufactured by Lintec Corporation). Thereby, the first laminated structure formed by laminating the base material, the adhesive layer, the thin film for forming a protective film, and the semiconductor wafer in the thickness direction in this order is produced.

其次,使用雷射印字裝置(EO Technics公司製「CSM300M」),藉由透過支撐片而對第1積層結構體中的保護膜形成用薄膜之中、黏著劑層側的面(第2面)照射雷射光而進行印字。此時,進行印字形成0.3mm×0.2mm大小的文字。Next, using a laser printing device (“CSM300M” manufactured by EO Technics Co., Ltd.), the surface (second surface) on the side of the adhesive layer of the film for forming a protective film in the first laminated structure was printed by passing through the support sheet. Printing is performed by irradiating laser light. At this time, printing was performed to form characters with a size of 0.3 mm×0.2 mm.

其次,透過支撐片、目視觀察該保護膜形成用薄膜的印字(雷射印字),依據下述基準而進行評價印字(文字)的視認性。將結果顯示在表1。在此所評價之保護膜形成用薄膜的印字視認性,能夠視為與保護膜的印字視認相等。 A:印字為鮮明且能夠容易地視認。 B:印字為若干模糊且無法容易地視認。 C:印字為不鮮明且無法視認。Next, the printing (laser printing) of this film for protective film formation was observed visually through a support sheet, and the visibility of printing (character) was evaluated based on the following reference|standard. The results are shown in Table 1. The print visibility of the protective film-forming film evaluated here can be considered to be equivalent to the print visibility of the protective film. A: Printed characters are vivid and can be easily seen. B: Printed characters are slightly blurred and cannot be easily recognized. C: Printed characters are unclear and cannot be recognized.

其次,將支撐片(基材及黏著劑層)從該保護膜形成用薄膜剝下。接著,使用光學顯微鏡、測定在保護膜形成用薄膜所形成的印字(文字)之線的粗細。其結果,線的粗細為40μm以上且能夠鮮明地印字。Next, the support sheet (base material and adhesive layer) is peeled off from this film for protective film formation. Next, the thickness of the lines of the printed characters (characters) formed on the film for protective film formation was measured using an optical microscope. As a result, the thickness of the line was 40 μm or more, and it was possible to print clearly.

(基材與黏著劑層之密著性評價) 依據JIS K5600-5-6,使用旋轉式切割器在支撐片黏著劑層切入1mm四方的格子狀100格且使黏著膠帶(CELLO-TAPE)[NICHIBAN公司製、註冊商標])壓黏之後,將黏著膠帶以約60˚的角度且0.5秒~1.0秒剝下時,藉由計算100格之中的殘留格數,來對基材與黏著劑層之密著性進行試驗。密著性評價基於下述的判定基準而進行。而且,基於下述基準而進行有關基材與黏著劑層的密著性之評價。將結果顯示在表1。 A:殘留格數為90以上。 B:殘留格數為70以上且小於90。 C:殘留格數為小於70。(Evaluation of Adhesion between Substrate and Adhesive Layer) According to JIS K5600-5-6, after cutting the adhesive layer of the support sheet into 100 grids of 1mm square with a rotary cutter and pressing the adhesive tape (CELLO-TAPE) [manufactured by NICHIBAN Corporation, registered trademark]), the When the adhesive tape is peeled off at an angle of about 60° for 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, the adhesion between the base material and the adhesive layer is tested by calculating the number of remaining cells in 100 cells. Adhesion evaluation was performed based on the following determination criteria. And the evaluation about the adhesiveness of a base material and an adhesive layer was performed based on the following reference|standard. The results are shown in Table 1. A: The number of remaining grids is 90 or more. B: The number of remaining grids is 70 or more and less than 90. C: The number of remaining grids is less than 70.

>支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片製造、以及支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片評價> [實施例2] 實施例1中的、除了將金屬輥的凹凸面在60℃邊加熱邊使其旋轉而按壓聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)的一表面時,將具有凹凸面之金屬輥及具有平滑面之金屬輥之間的間隙間隔調整成為比實施例1更狹窄之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法,製造一面為凹凸面且另一面為平滑面(光澤面)之基材。針對該基材的凹凸面測定基材的R值時為2.8。除了使用該基材之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法而製造支撐片且進行評價。 而且,除了使用此種支撐片之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法製造保護膜形成用複合片且進行評價。將結果顯示在表1。>Manufacture of support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet and evaluation of support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet> [Example 2] In Example 1, except that the concave-convex surface of the metal roll was rotated while heating at 60°C to press one surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), the metal roll with the concave-convex surface and Except that the gap between metal rollers with smooth surfaces is adjusted to be narrower than in Example 1, the same method as in Example 1 was used to manufacture a base material with one side having an uneven surface and the other side being a smooth surface (glossy surface) . When the R value of the substrate was measured with respect to the uneven surface of the substrate, it was 2.8. Except for the point of using this base material, the support sheet was produced and evaluated using the same method as in Example 1. And the composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except the point which used such a support sheet. The results are shown in Table 1.

[實施例3] 實施例2中的、除了將金屬輥的凹凸面在60℃邊加熱邊使其旋轉而按壓聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)的一表面時,將具有凹凸面之金屬輥及具有平滑面之金屬輥之間的間隙間隔調整成為比實施例2更狹窄之點以外,使用與實施例2時相同方法,製造一面為凹凸面且另一面為平滑面(光澤面)之基材。針對該基材的凹凸面測定基材的R值時為3.7。除了使用該基材之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法而製造支撐片且進行評價。 而且,除了使用此種支撐片之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法製造保護膜形成用複合片且進行評價。將結果顯示在表1。[Example 3] In Example 2, except that the concave-convex surface of the metal roll was rotated while heating at 60° C. to press one surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), the metal roll with the concave-convex surface and Except that the gap between metal rollers with smooth surfaces is adjusted to be narrower than that of Example 2, the same method as in Example 2 was used to manufacture a base material with one side having an uneven surface and the other side being a smooth surface (glossy surface) . When the R value of the substrate was measured with respect to the uneven surface of the substrate, it was 3.7. Except for the point of using this base material, the support sheet was produced and evaluated using the same method as in Example 1. And the composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except the point which used such a support sheet. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例1] 實施例1中的、除了將金屬輥的凹凸面在60℃邊加熱邊使其旋轉而按壓聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)的一表面時,將具有凹凸面之金屬輥及具有平滑面之金屬輥之間的間隙間隔調整成為比實施例1更寬闊之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法,製造一面為凹凸面且另一面為平滑面(光澤面)之基材。針對該基材的凹凸面測定基材的R值時為1.0。除了使用該基材之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法而製造支撐片且進行評價。 而且,除了使用此種支撐片之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法製造保護膜形成用複合片且進行評價。將結果顯示在表1。[Comparative example 1] In Example 1, except that the concave-convex surface of the metal roll was rotated while heating at 60°C to press one surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), the metal roll with the concave-convex surface and Except that the gap between metal rollers with smooth surfaces is adjusted to be wider than in Example 1, the same method as in Example 1 was used to manufacture a base material with one side having an uneven surface and the other side being a smooth surface (glossy surface) . When the R value of the substrate was measured with respect to the uneven surface of the substrate, it was 1.0. Except for the point of using this base material, the support sheet was produced and evaluated using the same method as in Example 1. And the composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except the point which used such a support sheet. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例2] 實施例3中的、除了將金屬輥的凹凸面在60℃邊加熱邊使其旋轉而按壓聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)的一表面時,將具有凹凸面之金屬輥及具有平滑面之金屬輥之間的間隙間隔調整成為比實施例3更狹窄之點以外,使用與實施例3時相同方法而製造一面為凹凸面且另一面為平滑面(光澤面)之基材。針對該基材的凹凸面測定基材的R值時為5.7。除了使用該基材之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法而製造支撐片且進行評價。 而且,除了使用此種支撐片之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法製造保護膜形成用複合片且進行評價。[Comparative example 2] In Example 3, except that the concave-convex surface of the metal roll was rotated while heating at 60° C. to press one surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), the metal roll with the concave-convex surface and Except that the gap between metal rollers with smooth surfaces is adjusted to be narrower than in Example 3, a base material with one side having an uneven surface and the other side being a smooth (glossy) surface was manufactured using the same method as in Example 3. . When the R value of the substrate was measured with respect to the uneven surface of the substrate, it was 5.7. Except for the point of using this base material, the support sheet was produced and evaluated using the same method as in Example 1. And the composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except the point which used such a support sheet.

而且,除了使用此種支撐片之點以外,使用與實施例1時相同方法製造保護膜形成用複合片且進行評價。將結果顯示在表1。And the composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except the point which used such a support sheet. The results are shown in Table 1.

表1

Figure 02_image006
Table 1
Figure 02_image006

從上述結果能夠清楚明白,在實施例1~3,黏著劑層的R值為2以上(2~4),基材與黏著劑之密著性為特別優異。又,在該等實施例,前述黏著劑層的R值為小於5.0(2~4)。保護膜及保護膜形成用薄膜之透過支撐片的印字視認性為特別優異。It is clear from the above results that in Examples 1 to 3, the R value of the adhesive layer is 2 or more (2 to 4), and the adhesion between the base material and the adhesive is particularly excellent. Moreover, in these embodiments, the R value of the aforementioned adhesive layer is less than 5.0 (2-4). The protective film and the film for forming a protective film are particularly excellent in the visibility of printed characters through the support sheet.

相對於此,在比較例1,黏著劑層的R值為1.2,基材與黏著劑之間的密著性不充分且在基材與黏著劑之間存在有非貼合區域。On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1, the R value of the adhesive layer was 1.2, the adhesiveness between the base material and the adhesive was insufficient, and a non-bonding region existed between the base material and the adhesive.

又,在比較例2,黏著劑層的R值為6.0,黏著劑層具有非常厚的區域。因此透過支撐片之保護膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)的印字視認性較差。 產業上之可利用性Also, in Comparative Example 2, the R value of the adhesive layer was 6.0, and the adhesive layer had a very thick region. Therefore, the visibility of printed characters through the protective film (film for forming a protective film) of the support sheet is poor. Industrial availability

本發明能夠利用於製造半導體裝置。The present invention can be utilized in the manufacture of semiconductor devices.

1A、1B、1C‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 10‧‧‧支撐片 10a‧‧‧支撐片之保護膜形成用薄膜側的面(第1面) 10b‧‧‧支撐片的第2面 11‧‧‧基材 11a‧‧‧基材之黏著劑層側的面(第1面、凹凸面) 11b‧‧‧基材11的第2面 12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12a‧‧‧黏著劑層之與基材側為相反側的面(第1面) 12b‧‧‧黏著劑層之基材側的面(第2面) 13、23 保護膜形成用薄膜 13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之與黏著劑層側為相反側的面 13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之黏著劑層側的面(第2面) 15‧‧‧剝離膜 16‧‧‧治具用接著劑層 16a‧‧‧治具用接著劑層上面及側面 23a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之未與黏著劑層接觸的面 23b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之黏著劑層側的面 91、92‧‧‧非貼合區域 La1、Lb1、La2、Lb2‧‧‧相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間之直線距離 L1、L2‧‧‧投影在對黏著劑層為水平方向的平面之線段 Ta‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度 Ta1‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度之最小值 Ta2‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度之最大值 Tp‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度1A, 1B, 1C‧‧‧Composite sheet for protective film formation 10‧‧‧Support sheet 10a‧‧‧Surface of the protective film forming film side (first surface) of the support sheet 10b‧‧‧Second surface of the support sheet 11‧‧‧Substrate 11a‧‧‧Surface on the side of the adhesive layer of the substrate (first surface, uneven surface) 11b‧‧‧Second surface of the substrate 11 12‧‧‧Adhesive layer 12a‧‧‧adhesion The surface (first surface) of the agent layer opposite to the substrate side 12b‧‧‧the substrate side surface (second surface) of the adhesive layer 13, 23 Protective film forming film 13a‧‧‧protective film formation The surface 13b of the film opposite to the adhesive layer side ‧‧‧the adhesive layer side (second surface) of the film for protective film formation 15‧‧‧peeling film 16‧‧‧adhesive layer for jigs 16a‧‧‧adhesive layer upper surface and side surface for jig 23a‧‧‧surface of protective film forming film not in contact with adhesive layer 23b‧‧‧surfaces 91, 92 of adhesive layer side of protective film forming film ‧‧‧Non-bonding area L a1 , L b1 , L a2 , L b2 ‧‧‧The straight-line distance L 1 , L 2 between adjacent meaningful vertices ‧‧‧Projected on the horizontal direction of the adhesive layer Line segment T a of plane T a ‧‧‧thickness of adhesive layer T a1 ‧‧‧minimum value of adhesive layer thickness T a2 ‧‧‧maximum value of adhesive layer thickness T p ‧‧‧thickness of protective film forming film thickness

第1圖示意性地顯示本發明之一實施形態的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之剖面圖。 第2圖同時示意性顯示本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片及支撐片之剖面圖。 第3圖同時示意性顯示本發明之一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片及支撐片之剖面圖。 第4圖第1圖顯示之支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖面圖。 第5圖第1圖顯示之支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖面圖。Fig. 1 schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 3 schematically shows a cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the supporting sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in Fig. 1 . Fig. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the supporting sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in Fig. 1 .

1A‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 1A‧‧‧Composite sheet for protective film formation

10‧‧‧支撐片 10‧‧‧Support piece

10a‧‧‧支撐片之保護膜形成用薄膜側的面(第1面) 10a‧‧‧The surface of the protective film forming film side of the support sheet (1st surface)

10b‧‧‧支撐片的第2面 10b‧‧‧The second side of the support piece

11‧‧‧基材 11‧‧‧Substrate

11a‧‧‧基材之黏著劑層側的面(第1面、凹凸面) 11a‧‧‧The surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer (first surface, uneven surface)

11b‧‧‧基材11的第2面 11b‧‧‧The second surface of the substrate 11

12a‧‧‧黏著劑層之與基材側為相反側的面(第1面) 12a‧‧‧The side of the adhesive layer opposite to the base material side (first side)

12b‧‧‧黏著劑層之基材側的面(第2面) 12b‧‧‧The surface of the substrate side of the adhesive layer (second surface)

12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12‧‧‧adhesive layer

13‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜 13‧‧‧Film for protective film formation

13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之與黏著劑層側為相反側的面 13a‧‧‧The surface of the film for forming a protective film that is opposite to the side of the adhesive layer

13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜之黏著劑層側的面(第2面) 13b‧‧‧The surface of the film for forming a protective film on the side of the adhesive layer (second surface)

15‧‧‧剝離膜 15‧‧‧Peeling film

16‧‧‧治具用接著劑層 16‧‧‧adhesive layer for jig

16a‧‧‧治具用接著劑層上面及側面 16a‧‧‧The upper surface and side of the adhesive layer for jigs

Claims (3)

一種支撐片,係具備基材,且在前述基材上具備黏著劑層之支撐片, 前述基材之前述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面, 從前述支撐片的5處切取試驗片,在該等5片試驗片觀察前述黏著劑層的剖面時,(相鄰有意義的頂點彼此之間的直線距離之合計)/(對黏著劑層為水平方向之直線距離)之比的平均值為1.5以上且小於5.0。A support sheet is provided with a base material, and the support sheet is provided with an adhesive layer on the aforementioned base material, The surface of the aforementioned substrate on the side of the aforementioned adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface, Cut test pieces from 5 places of the aforementioned support sheet, and observe the cross-section of the aforementioned adhesive layer on these 5 test pieces, (the sum of the straight-line distances between adjacent meaningful vertices)/(horizontal to the adhesive layer The average value of the ratio of the linear distance in the direction) is 1.5 or more and less than 5.0. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之支撐片,其中前述黏著劑層與前述基材的凹凸面直接接觸。The supporting sheet as described in claim 1 of the patent application, wherein the aforementioned adhesive layer is in direct contact with the concave-convex surface of the aforementioned substrate. 一種保護膜形成用複合片,係在如申請專利範圍第1或2項所述之支撐片中的黏著劑層上具備保護膜形成用薄膜。A composite sheet for forming a protective film comprising a thin film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet as described in claim 1 or 2 of the patent application.
TW108110458A 2018-03-30 2019-03-26 Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film TWI788543B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2018/013569 WO2019186992A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Support sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
WOPCT/JP2018/013569 2018-03-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202003251A TW202003251A (en) 2020-01-16
TWI788543B true TWI788543B (en) 2023-01-01

Family

ID=64899589

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108110458A TWI788543B (en) 2018-03-30 2019-03-26 Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6445747B1 (en)
KR (1) KR102388900B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111373509B (en)
TW (1) TWI788543B (en)
WO (1) WO2019186992A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112313280A (en) * 2018-06-12 2021-02-02 积水化学工业株式会社 Resin material and multilayer printed wiring board
KR20240038845A (en) 2022-09-16 2024-03-26 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Protective film module and method for manufacturing display device using the same

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104755259A (en) * 2012-10-22 2015-07-01 三菱丽阳株式会社 Layered structure and method for manufacturing same, and article
JP2016188344A (en) * 2015-03-30 2016-11-04 リンテック株式会社 Release film, adhesive sheet, and method for producing release film
TW201713505A (en) * 2015-10-05 2017-04-16 琳得科股份有限公司 Semiconductor processing sheet
JP6298226B1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-03-20 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5432853B2 (en) 1971-10-11 1979-10-17
US6638602B2 (en) * 2000-09-04 2003-10-28 Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha Adhesive wrapping film
JP4517572B2 (en) 2002-11-15 2010-08-04 Dic株式会社 Reflective / shading adhesive tape
JP5457745B2 (en) * 2008-07-15 2014-04-02 サン・トックス株式会社 Base film
JP5432853B2 (en) * 2010-07-30 2014-03-05 日東電工株式会社 Dicing tape-integrated film for semiconductor back surface, manufacturing method thereof, and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2015196313A (en) 2014-03-31 2015-11-09 ソニー株式会社 Protective film, laminate, display device, and film-attaching unit

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104755259A (en) * 2012-10-22 2015-07-01 三菱丽阳株式会社 Layered structure and method for manufacturing same, and article
JP2016188344A (en) * 2015-03-30 2016-11-04 リンテック株式会社 Release film, adhesive sheet, and method for producing release film
TW201713505A (en) * 2015-10-05 2017-04-16 琳得科股份有限公司 Semiconductor processing sheet
JP6298226B1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-03-20 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2019186992A1 (en) 2019-10-03
TW202003251A (en) 2020-01-16
JP6445747B1 (en) 2018-12-26
KR20200138148A (en) 2020-12-09
JPWO2019186992A1 (en) 2020-04-30
KR102388900B1 (en) 2022-04-20
CN111373509B (en) 2024-01-30
CN111373509A (en) 2020-07-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102313074B1 (en) Composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film
KR102637275B1 (en) Sheet for forming a protective film, method for manufacturing a sheet for forming a protective film, and method for manufacturing a semiconductor device
TWI783131B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
KR102516392B1 (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI788543B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
JP6818009B2 (en) Composite sheet for forming a protective film
TWI822742B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
TWI783920B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI812687B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI801532B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
KR102524205B1 (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and manufacturing method thereof
KR102469880B1 (en) Support sheet and its manufacturing method, and composite sheet for forming a protective film and its manufacturing method